Carlsbad City Council
September 29, 2026

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

B. Factory Finish: SDI A250.3.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Contract No. 5554 081113 - 6

2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.
f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.

Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions.

8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Contract No. 5554 081113 - 7
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.

Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
c. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch (19.1 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.8 mm)] plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing:

Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection.

Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Contract No. 5554 081113 - 8
END OF SECTION 081113

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 1
SECTION 089119 FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. 2. Fixed formed-metal acoustical louvers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors.

2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for field painting exterior louvers.

3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field painting interior louvers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axis of the blades are horizontal).

C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axis of the blades are vertical).

D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.

E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven-rain performance, as determined by testing in accordance with AMCA 500-L.

F. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified windborne-debris- impact resistance, as determined by testing in accordance with AMCA 540.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 2

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashings, sealants, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.

D. Delegated Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural[ and seismic] performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed in accordance with AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified.

B. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports.

C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty, Factory-Applied Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of baked enamel, powder coat, or organic finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 3

2. Warranty Period: [Five] <5> years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.
c. Cracking, peeling, or chipping.

2. Warranty Period: [Five] <5> years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Architectural louvers
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fixed louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural[ and seismic ] performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Louvers withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures are considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads:
a. Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. b. Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of [20 lbf/sq. ft. (957 Pa)] [30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa)] <Insert value>, acting inward or outward. c. Determine loads based on pressures indicated below:
1) Corner Zone: Within <Insert distance > of building corners, uniform pressure of <Insert design wind pressure>, acting inward, and <Insert design wind pressure>, acting outward.

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 4
C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade pass enhanced protection, when tested in accordance with AMCA 540.

D. Seismic Performance:

1. As indicated on Drawings.

2. Louvers, including attachments to other construction, withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with [ASCE/SEI 7].
a. Component Importance Factor: [1.5] [1.0].

E. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width in accordance with AMCA 500-L.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces
G. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

2.3 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver, Extruded Aluminum:

1. Louver Depth: See plans

2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: See plans

3. Mullion Type: Exposed.

4. Louver Performance Ratings:
a. Free Area: See plans
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: See plans
c. Air Performance: See plans

5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.4 FIXED FORMED-METAL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver, Formed Metal

1. Louver Depth: Per Plans.

2. Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness:
a. Galvanized-steel sheet, not less than [0.052 inch (1.32 mm) for frames and 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) for blades] [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [0.064 inch (1.63 mm)]. b. Stainless steel sheet, not less than [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] [0.062 inch (1.59 mm)].

3. Mullion Type: Exposed.

4. Louver Performance Ratings:

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 5
a. Free Area: See plans
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: See plans
c. Air Performance: See plans

5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.5 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, [G60 (Z180)] [G90 (Z275)] zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304, [No. 2B finish] [No. 2D finish] [No. 4 finish, with grain running parallel to length of blades and frame members] [No. 4 finish, with grain running perpendicular to length of blades and frame members] [No. 4 finish, with grain running perpendicular to length of blades and parallel to length of frame members] [No. 6 finish].

E. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use [Phillips flat-head] [hex-head or Phillips pan-head] [tamper-resistant] screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless steel fasteners.

3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized-steel or 300 series stainless steel fasteners.

4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless steel fasteners.

5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

F. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless steel components, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated in accordance with ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 6

1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern [unless horizontal mullions are indicated] [where indicated].

2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints [unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated] [where indicated].

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing[, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill,] to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: [Channel] [Exterior flange] [Interior flange ] unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less.

1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

2. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades, so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

3. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.

4. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered [and welded blades] [blades with concealed close-fitting splices] and with [fully recessed] [semirecessed] mullions at corners.

G. Provide [subsills made of same material as louvers] [or ] [extended sills] for recessed louvers.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds [concealed from view] [, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer] unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA- M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.

1. Color: Per Architect’s Selection.

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 7
C. Conversion-Coated Finish: AA-C12C42, nonetched, cleaned with inhibited chemicals, and chemical conversion coated with acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate.

D. Factory-Primed Finish: AA-C12C42R1x with air-dried primer of not less than 2-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

E. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: Per Architect’s Selection
F. High-Performance Organic Finish, Two-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying with [AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605] and containing not less than [50] [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.

1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions [for seacoast and severe environments].

2. Color and Gloss: Per Architect’s Selection.

G. Superior-Performance Organic Finish, Three-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions [for seacoast and severe environments].

2. Color and Gloss Per Architect’s Selection.

H. Superior-Performance Organic Finish, Four-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions [for seacoast and severe environments].

2. Color and Gloss: Per Architect’s Selection.

I. Superior-Performance Organic Finish, Single-Coat FEVE: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605.

1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color and Gloss: Per Architect’s Selection.

J. Superior-Performance Organic Finish, Two-Coat FEVE: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605.

1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions for seacoast and severe environments.

2. Color and Gloss: Per Architect’s Selection.

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 8

2.8 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent, so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair in accordance with ASTM A780/A780M.

C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).

1. Color and Gloss: Per Architect’s Selection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

FIXED LOUVERS
Contract No. 5554 089119 - 9
F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.

END OF SECTION 089119

CEMENT PLASTERING
Contract No. 5554 092400-1
SECTION 09 2400 CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cement plastering.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2021.

B. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime 2014.

C. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 2018.

D. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters 2015 (Reapproved 2020).

E. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster 2021.

F. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 2020.

G. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products current edition.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate components of fire rated assemblies with materials specified for support of plaster in other Sections.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Prior to application of Cement Plaster Work, Contractor, Installer, and other Installers whose work may affect quality of work shall meet at the Project site to coordinate related requirements and plaster work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials and trim accessories.

2. Shop drawings: Coordinate with Section 09 2236 - Lath.

3. Samples:

CEMENT PLASTERING
Contract No. 5554 092400-1
a. Submit 3 samples, 12 by 12 inch (300 by 300 mm) in size illustrating finish color and texture. b. Submit two samples of each type trim accessory.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Evaluation Service Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements.

2. Installer Qualifications: Written data for company, principal, personnel, experience, and training required by "Quality Assurance" article.

1.5 SUSTAINABILITY SUBMITTALS
A. CAL-Green documentation and verification data for the following measures:

1. A5.405.1: Regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material.

2. A4.405.3 Recycled content materials, equivalent in performance to virgin materials. Provide cost documentation showing value of recycled content using A4.405.3.1.1.

3. A5.406.1, .2 and .3: Materials selected for longevity, reduced maintenance and recyclability.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) or lower, or when temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) within 48 hours of application.

B. Do not use frozen or previously frozen materials; do not apply cement plaster to frozen surfaces or surfaces with frost present.

1. Protect installation from freezing minimum 24 hours after initial set.

C. Do not install cement plaster in direct sunlight for extended periods of time to prevent uneven or premature evaporation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATIONS
A. Lath Plaster Base: Metal lath.

1. Plaster Type: Factory prepared plaster mix.

CEMENT PLASTERING
Contract No. 5554 092400-1

2. Number of Coats: Three.
a. First Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm). b. Second Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm). c. Leveling Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/32 to 1/16 inch (0.79 to 1.6 mm). d. Finish Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2.2 FACTORY PREPARED CEMENT PLASTER
A. Premixed Plaster for Stucco Scratch and Brown Coats: Factory mixed and packaged, complying with material requirements of ASTM C926.

1. Acceptable Products:
a. Amerimix, an Oldcastle brand; AMX 700 SBF: www.amerimix.com. b. BMI Products; BMI 690 Standard with Fibers: www.bmi-products.com. c. LaHabra Stucco Solutions; Fiber 47 Armour Wall Scratch & Brown Sanded:
www.lahabrastucco.com.
d. Omega Products; Super Cement Fibered: www.omega-products.com.

B. Premixed Plaster for Level Coat: Factory mixed and packaged, complying with material requirements of ASTM C926.

1. Acceptable Products:
a. BMI Products; BMI 690 Standard with Fibers: www.bmi-products.com. b. LaHabra Stucco Solutions; Stucco Level Coat: www.lahabrastucco.com. c. Melex Stucco; Basex: www.merlex.com
d. Reinforcing Mesh: 4.5 oz/sq yd (153 g/sq m) alkali-resistant mesh. 1) Acceptable Products: For use with Sanat Barbara and smooth finishes (a) Parex USA, Inc.; 355 Standard Mesh: www.parex.com.

C. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates,coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients.

1. Integral Color: Match existing.

2. Basis of Design Product:
a. LaHabra Stucco Solutions; Santa Barbara Mission Finish. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) El Rey Stucco Solutions; a Parex USA, Inc. brand.
2) Omega Products International, Inc..
3) Approved equal.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236 - Lath.

B. Reinforcing Mesh: 4.5 oz/sq yd (153 g/sq m) alkali-resistant mesh.

1. Acceptable Products: For use with smooth finishes.
a. Parex USA, Inc.; 355 Standard Mesh: www.parex.com.

C. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

D. Fiber Reinforcement: Nylon or polypropylene monofilament fibers conforming to ASTM C 1116 Type III (synthetic fiber-reinforced concrete or shotcrete). AR chopped glass fiber strands

CEMENT PLASTERING
Contract No. 5554 092400-1
are not permitted.

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes.

Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials.

2.4 PLASTER MIXES
A. Over Metal Lath: Mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C926.

1. Three-coat application.

B. Premixed Plaster Materials: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Finish Coat: Premixed.

1. Add color pigments to finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.

E. Install reinforced leveling coat according to manufacturer's requirements for specified system.

F. Add color pigments to finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.

H. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and excessive evaporation.

I. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

C. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.

B. Verify that weather barrier and air barrier are properly installed.

CEMENT PLASTERING
Contract No. 5554 092400-1
C. Verify metal lath has been installed in accordance with Section 09 2236 - Lath.

1. Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are properly in place.

D. Verify mechanical and electrical equipment and services located within areas to receive this work have been properly tested and approved.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect finished surfaces installed prior to plastering as required to prevent damage. Maintain protection in place until completion of plastering
B. Apply dash bond coat of plaster to solid bases and moist cure for at least 24 hours before applying first coat of jobsite mixed plaster.

3.3 MIXING
A. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.

B. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.

C. Protect mixtures from frost or freezing temperatures, contamination, and excessive evaporation.

3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and comply with ASTM C926.

B. Base Coats - General:

1. Apply base coats to fully embed lath and to specified thickness.

2. Follow guidelines in ASTM C926 and manufacturer's written installation instructions for moist curing base coats and application of subsequent coats.

3. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in 10 feet (3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces when measured by a 10 foot (3 m) straighte dge placed on surface.
a. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
b. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.

C. Three-Coat Application Over Metal Lath:

1. Apply first coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm).

2. Apply second coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm).

3. Apply reinforcing mesh in leveling coat while still wet; smooth mesh and remove wrinkles and loose ends.

4. Apply leveling coat.

CEMENT PLASTERING
Contract No. 5554 092400-1

5. Apply finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

D. Application of Scratch Coat:

1. Apply to uniform thickness indicated to completely embed metal lath.

2. Uniformly score surface approximately 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) deep.

3. Allow to cure 7 days before applying brown coat.

E. Application of Brown Coat:

1. After scratch coat has cured to be sufficient rigid, apply brown coat to uniform thickness indicated over damp scratch coat with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight, uniform bond.

2. Rod to true, even plane, filling surface defects with plaster.

3. Uniformly float surface 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) deep.

4. Allow to cure 7 days before applying brown coat.

F. Leveling Coat:

1. Location: Areas requiring a smooth trowel coat finish.

2. Apply leveling coat to specified thickness.

3. Fully embed reinforcing mesh in leveling coat.

G. Finish Coats:

1. Cement Plaster:
a. Apply with sufficient material and pressure to ensure complete coverage of base to specified thickness.
b. Apply desired surface texture while mix is still workable. c. Finish: Smooth trowel 20/30.

H. Moist Curing:

1. Follow procedures for each coat as recommended by ASTM C926 and PCA and as required based on environmental conditions.

2. Prevent premature dry-out.
a. Cure each coat minimum 48 hours;
1) Allow minimum 7 day interval between application of scratch and brown coat. 2) Allow minimum 7 day interval between application of brown and finish coat. 3) Keep scratch and brown coat uniformly moist during curing period by applying fine fog spray of water. Apply fog spray at least twice daily in morning and evening. Exercise care to avoid eroding scratch coat.

I. Cementitious Finishes: After curing, dampen previous coat prior to applying finish coat.

3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m).

3.6 REPAIR
A. Cut, patch, repair and point-up cement plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Point- up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces.

B. Patching: Remove loose, damaged or defective plaster and replace with plaster of same

CEMENT PLASTERING
Contract No. 5554 092400-1
composition; finish to match surrounding area.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.

END OF SECTION

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 1
SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on:

1. Exterior substrates:

2. The following substrates:
a. Portland Cement Plaster (stucco)
b. F errous Metal
c. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated)
d. Wood

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

H. EG: Ethylene Glycol. Ethylene glycol is listed as a hazardous air pollutant (HAP) by the I. U.S. EPA
J. Blocking: Two painted surfaces sticking together such as a painted door sticking to a painted jamb.

K. RAVOC: Reactivity adjusted VOC ‘Reactivity’ means the ability of a VOC to promote ozone formation.

L. PDCA: Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.org

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 2
M. SSPC: Scopes of SSPC Surface Preparation Standards and Specifications.

N. Owner – usage of the term “Owner” shall be construed to mean the actual owner of the Property or a duly authorized representative of the owner.

O. Property – usage of the term “Property” shall be construed to mean the property location identified in paragraph 1.1 B. 1. of this specification at which location the work shall be performed.

P. Painting Contractor – usage of the term “Contractor” shall be construed to mean the 3 rd party contractor performing the painting portion of the p r o j e c t .

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, no smaller than 7 inches by 10 inches (177.8 mm by 254 mm) or larger than 8.5 inches by 11 inches (215.9 mm by 279.4 mm).

2. Label each Sample for project, owner’s agent, general contractor, painting contractor, paint color name and number, paint brand name, 'P' number if applicable, and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the f o l l o w i n g :

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas.

2. VOC content.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Ten [10] percent, but not less than [1 gal. (3.8 L)] of each material and color applied.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 3
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Owner’s agent will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: owner’s agent will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by owner’s agent at a cost to be agreed upon by Contractor and Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the paint systems indicated unless owner’s agent specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C) or more than 120 deg F (49 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas d a i l y .

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Surfaces must be clean and moisture free. Prime and paint as soon as possible. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist. No painting shall be done immediately after rain or foggy weather or when the temperature is below 50 °F. Substrate temperature must be 5 °F or more above dew point temperature while painting and during the coating’s cure time. Avoid painting surfaces while they are exposed to a full, hot sun.

B. Painting contractor should follow proper painting practices and exercise judgment based on his or her experience and project specific conditions as to when to proceed.

C. WIND VELOCITY: Excessive wind velocity can seriously impair spray application, resulting

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 4
in significant material loss, low film build, excessive dry spray or overspray, plus the possibility of depositing airborne spray mist on unprotected surfaces downwind from the work. Some of these adverse effects can be compensated for by material and equipment adjustments if winds are not too high. Generally speaking, wind velocity 1 5 m.p.h. or higher can cause sufficient spray application problems, in which case suspending work until conditions improve should be c o n s i d e r e d .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Dunn-Edwards Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured or distributed by the Dunn-Edwards Corporation; Sherwin Williams Corporation, Pratt and Lambert P a i n t s .

B. Tnemec (800) 863-6321: Apply products according to manufacturer’s written recommendations.

C. Precision Coatings (801) 489-8633: Apply products according to manufacturer’s written recommendations.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Colorants: The use of colorants containing hazardous chemicals, such as ethylene glycol, is prohibited.

D. Colors: As Selected by owner's agent from manufacturer's full range.

1. Where color is selected prior to bid submittal, Contractor shall bid two (2), or more finish coats, as appropriate to the color selected, and shall expressly state number of finish and prime coats and type (full or spot) of prime coat.

2. When the final color has not been selected prior to bid submittal, Contractor may need to bid additional coats when submitting their bid. The Owner should be aware that if a color is chosen following the bid process and the color is significantly different from original color, a change order for an additional finish coat might be required.

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 5

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke testing.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

C. Exterior Substrates:

1. Concrete: 11 percent or less.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 11 percent or less.

3. Wood: 15 percent or less.

4. Plaster: 5 percent or less.

D. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured, including pH testing to determine that alkalinity is within limits established by the manufacturer.

E. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and paint systems

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 6
indicated.

B. Scraping or sanding surfaces of older buildings (especially pre-1978) may release dust containing lead or asbestos. EXPOSURE TO LEAD OR ASBESTOS CAN BE VERY HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH. Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment during surface preparation, and finish cleanup of any residues by water- washing all surfaces. For more information, see Dunn-Edwards brochure on “Surface Preparation Safety” or call EPA’s National Lead Information Hotline at 1-800-424- LEAD, or visit www.epa.gov/lead or/asbestos, or contact your state or local Health Department.

C. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply bond coat as required to produce paint systems i n d i c a t e d .

E. Where mildew is present, remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial mildew remover, or, with a solution of one (1) part household bleach mixed in three (3) parts waters by volume. The solution should be left on the surface for a minimum of twenty (20) minutes, rinsed thoroughly with clean water to remove any residue, and then allowed to dry completely prior to application of patching/caulking/prime/finish coat systems.

F. Moisture: All areas that may cause paint failure due to moisture shall be addressed and eliminated. This would include, but is not limited t o :

1. Gutters and downspouts not working properly.

2. Previous coats of paint not adhering properly.

3. Wood checking (cracks and splits in wood).

4. Deteriorated caulking.

5. Gaps between substrates.

6. Rotten wood.

7. Areas affected by water splashing.

8. Painting in inclement weather.

9. Painting a substrate where residual moisture exceeds limits stated in 3.1.B.

10. Un-caulked nail holes.

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 7
G. Pressure washing and surface preparation methods

1. Pressure wash or water blast to remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and loose paint at pressures of 2500-3500 p.s.i. at a flow of 3.0-3.5 gallons per minute. This is the recommended standard for optimal efficiency.

H. Prior to application of prime/finish interior and/or exterior coat systems, provide a clean, sound surface free of dust, dirt contaminants, mildew and efflorescence by use of a power wash and hand scraping or use of mechanical grinders where necessary. Additionally, areas are to be scrubbed with a bristle brush to insure complete removal of any residual salts. Remove all labels, stickers, price tags, etc. from surfaces before priming. Wood areas stamped with ink codes must be spot primed with blocking primers. Power wash areas to be coated to ensure that new salt deposits do not occur. Failure to do so may cause adhesion issues or result in delamination and invalidate any manufacturer warranty given or implied. After cleaning if there is still chalk evident, this condition must be brought to the owner’s attention in writing before any further work is done.

I. Cementitious Substrates: (concrete, stucco, masonry) Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Wire brush all loose and peeling paint and dust all surfaces before spot priming or applying finish coats. Industry standards apply to applications of cracks, voids, and repairs. Any areas of repair shall be patched and dried before coatings are applied.

Cracks should be repaired as follows: 1. Cracks less than ¼” wide should be filled using Dunn-Edwards Brush Grade Elastomeric Patch. 2. Cracks wider than ¼“should be cut and scraped to a “V” shape and filled with Dunn-Edwards Trowel

2. Grade Elastomeric Patch. Large cracks and holes may require repeated applications of patching materials to bring flush with adjacent substrate. Feather-in all repairs and caulking to blend with adjacent substrate.

3. Large holes in stucco / plaster/ concrete will be patched with Rapid Set Premium Stucco Patch or Rapid Set Wunderfixx Concrete Patching Compound in appropriate texture to blend with existing texture. Allow stucco patch to cure to acceptable pH level

4. (10) prior to application of prime/finish coat systems. Caulk large cracks in stucco / plaster/ cement with GE-Life Time 920.

5. Spot prime over all patched areas, cracks, and holes then use an appropriate topping material to match existing surface level and texture.

J. All Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing.
a. SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning."
b. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
c. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 8

1. All ferrous metals should be thoroughly cleaned, and all loose rust or mill scale be removed by wire brush, scraper and/or power tool, such as an electric drill with a wire brush attachment. Any rust spots or bare metal should receive the appropriate prime coat. Rust inhibited primer to be applied on all properly prepared surfaces where rust is evident. Any hard, glossy surfaces should be dulled. Previously painted ferrous metal in sound condition should be washed down with a strong detergent-type cleaner such as Krud-Kutter or Simple Green.

2. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
a. All galvanized gutters and flashing should be thoroughly cleaned to remove loose and peeling paint.
b. Any bare galvanized metal should be wiped down with a non-petroleum solvent cleaner.
c. Prime bare metal with the specified galvanized metal primer. d. Any rust on galvanized metal must be removed. Clean to bare metal and apply a rust inhibitive primer.

4. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface o x i d a t i o n .

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. The number of coats scheduled is the minimum number of coats required. Additional coat(s) shall be applied at no additional cost to the Owner, to completely hide base material, provide uniform color, and to produce satisfactory finish results.

3. Apply coatings without thinning except as specifically required by label directions or required by these specifications. In such cases, thinning shall be the minimum reduction permitted.

4. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

5. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.

6. Paint the entire exposed surface of window frames and s a s h e s .

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 9

7. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature p l a t e s .

8. Priming may not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats, unless otherwise specified. Touch up prime coats applied by others as required ensuring an even primed surface before applying finish coat.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and a p p e a r a n c e .

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Block Fillers: Provide block fill as scheduled to conform to the following PDCA Standard P12-05.
a. Level 3 - Premium fill: One or multiple coats of high performance block filler manufactured to be applied at a high dry film build. Block filler shall be back- rolled to eliminate voids and reduce the majority of the masonry profile depth.

F. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:
a. Equipment, including panel boards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film t h i c k n e s s .

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 10

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At the end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by owner’s agent, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Prepare, paint and finish all surfaces specified and agreed u p o n .

1. Provide paint finishes of even uniform color, free from cloudy or muddled appearance.

2. Properly correct all non-complying work to the satisfaction of owner and owner’s representative and the representative of the paint manufacturer.

3. Finish all surfaces in accordance with the following schedule. Catalog product names and numbers refer to products manufactured by the Dunn Edwards Company, Los Angeles, California. Catalog color names and numbers refer to products as indicated in Drawing.

Color not indicated, to be chosen by Architect from Manufacture standard color selection.

Paint application finish schedule:

B. EXTERIOR SURFACES; (Ferrous Metal):

1. Metal Stair, Railing, Gate, Exposed Metal Framing: Semi-gloss Finish (Total dry film thickness shall be no less than 4.5 mils):
1st Coat: Devoe Bar-Rust 235V Multi-Purpose Epoxy Coating 2nd Coat: Devthane 379H Polyurethane
3rd Coat: Devthane 379H Polyurethane
SPECIAL NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS:

1. MINIMAL PREPARATION For coatings requiring only minimal surface preparation, the surface needs to be prepared in accordance to SSPC-SP 1 and SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3.

Tightly adhered rust and or previous coating can remain provided it cannot be removed by

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 11
lifting with a dull putty knife using moderate pressure. Use SSPC-SP 7 (NACE 4) to expedite the preparation of large areas.

2. The areas of rust that have deteriorated the fence to the point of holes in the substrate will need to be replaced prior to painting.

3. Due to the severe deterioration of many areas of the fence examination and correct preparation of the substrate is crucial to the success of the paint project.

4. For lead safety refer to 3.2 B. and Dunn-Edwards PI sheets under Special Instructions.

C. EXTERIOR SURFACES; (Cement Plaster):

1. Cement Plaster (Stucco): Flat Finish (Total dry film thickness shall be no less than 4.5 mils):

Primer: EFF-STOP Select Masonry Primer/Sealer (ESSL00)
1st Coat: SPARTASHIELD, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Paint (SSHL10) 2nd Coat: SPARTASHIELD, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Paint (SSHL10) SPECIAL NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS:

1. On previously painted surfaces, wash, patch, and prime exposed areas. Fill and caulk voids, seams, and joints, especially around doors and windows to prevent moisture intrusion (if applicable). Surface must be dry and free of dirt, grease, and oil. Protect areas not being painted.

D. EXTERIOR SURFACES; (Aluminum):

1. Unpainted Aluminum Metal: Flat Finish (Total dry film thickness shall be no less than

4.5 mils):
1st Coat: GALV-ALUM Epoxy Galvanized/Aluminum Metal Primer (43- 7) 2nd Coat: SPARTASHIELD, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Paint (SSHL10) 3rd Coat: SPARTASHIELD, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Paint (SSHL10)
SPECIAL NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Any chalkiness needs to be removed, must be washed and scrubbed off, and any flaking and/or peeling paint must be removed.

2. Surface must be dry and free of dirt, grease, and oil.

3. Protect areas not being painted.

E. EXTERIOR SURFACES;

1. Steel, Galvanized Steel, Non-Ferrous Metal, or Wood

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 12
1st Coat, Primer: Tnemec Steel, Series 1
Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal: Tnemec Series 27WB Wood: Tnemec Series 10-99W
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 2HS, Low VOC Tneme-Gloss
3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 2HS, Low VOC Tneme-Gloss
END OF SECTION 099113

EXTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099113 - 13

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

INTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099123 - 1
SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

INTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099123 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

1. Dunn Edwards.

2. Sherwin Williams.

3. Frazee.

4. ICI.

5. Vista

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.

B. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149.

C. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.

D. Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal: MPI #79.

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS
A. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54.

B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147.

C. Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #141.

INTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099123 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Wood: 15 percent.

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

3. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in " MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual " applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

INTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099123 - 4

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

B. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork, doors, windows, exposed joists, exposed beams, etc. As indicated on the Drawings.

1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

C. Fiberglass and Plastic Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

D. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.

INTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099123 - 5
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

END OF SECTION 099123

INTERIOR PAINTING
Contract No. 5554 099123 - 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
Contract No. 5554 099600 - 1 SECTION 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:

1. Exterior Substrates:
a. Concrete surfaces.
b. Steel.
c. Wood.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
Contract No. 5554 099600 - 2

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another, and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 METAL PRIMERS
A. Primer, Zinc-Rich, Inorganic: MPI #19.

B. Primer, Zinc-Rich, Epoxy: MPI #20.

C. Primer, Epoxy, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal: MPI #101.

D. Primer, Vinyl Wash: MPI #80.

2.4 EPOXY COATINGS
A. Epoxy, High-Build, Low Gloss: MPI #108.

B. Epoxy Deck Coating (Slip-Resistant): MPI #82.

2.5 POLYURETHANE COATINGS
A. Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #72.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
a. Concrete: 12 percent.

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
Contract No. 5554 099600 - 3 B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual” and "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:

1. Epoxy System:
a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.
b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.
c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
Contract No. 5554 099600 - 4 B. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces:

1. Epoxy Slip-Resistant Deck Coating System:
a. Topcoat: Epoxy deck coating (slip-resistant), MPI #82.

C. Steel Substrates:

1. High-Build Epoxy System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #101. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss, MPI #108. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

D. Wood Substrates:

1. Pigmented Polyurethane System:
a. Prime Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #72.
b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #72.
c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #72.

END OF SECTION 099600

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-1

SECTION 26 00 00
BAS

IC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This scope covers the furnishing, installation, testing, adjusting and placing in operation all
electrical equipment, devices, facilities, materials, and auxiliary items necessary for the complete and successful operation of all electrical equipment as herein described, shown on the plans, or deemed necessary for the completion of the electrical portion of the project. It is the intent of DIVISION 26 to outline the electrical requirements of the contract in order to provide the information necessary for the construction of a fully operational system as shown on the plans and as herein described. A comprehensive electrical scope of work is as follows:

1. Power/Electrical System

2. Lighting System

3. Control System

4. Utility Work

5. Connection of Electrically Powered Mechanical Equipment

6. Temporary Construction Power

7. All Incidentals Necessary for a Complete and Fully Operational Electrical Syst
em.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con
dit
ions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Other sections that may relate to the work in this section include, but are not limi ted to, the following:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements

2. Division 26 – Ele ctrical

3. Division 40 – Pr oce ss Interconnections

4. Design and Construction Standards for the City of Carlsbad

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of the General Provisions.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-2

1. The Contractor installing all Electrical work shall review and approve all electr
ical
shop drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer for review. As part of the review, the installer shall certify the following:
a. I hereby certify that the (equipment (material) (article) shown and marked i
n this submittal is in compliance with the contract drawing and specifications, can be installed in the allocated space, will be stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation, will be installed per NEC, and is submitted for approval.

Certified by: Date:

B. Shop drawings received without the Certification above will be returned without being revi
ewed. The Certification must be signed by the Certified Electrician in responsible charge of the project.

C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittal of related
systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. No electrical work may be performed until shop drawings are approved. Shop Drawings on the Following Systems shall be as Grouped Below:

1. Low Voltage Power/Electrical System
a. Conduit and Conduit Fittings
b. Wire
c. Pull Boxes
d. Panelboards
e. Panelboard Layouts
f. Circuit Breakers
g. Disconnects
h. Fuses
i. Conduit Support Systems
j. Wiring Devices
k. Switchboards
l. Transformers
m. Surge Protection Equipment
n. Motor Starters
o. VFDs
p. Equipment and Conduit Supports

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-3

2. Medium Voltage
a.

Medium Voltage Switchgear
b. Medium Voltage Cabling
c. Medium Voltage Padmount Transformers
d. Load Break Elbows

3. Generator Switchgear
a. Generator Switchgear Modifications

4. Cable Tray System
a. Cable Tray
b. Cable Tray Supports
c. Road Crossings
d. Cable Tray Building Exits
e. Cable Tray supports

5. Lighting System
a. All Light Fixtures
i. Computer Printout of Lighting Layout
ii. Sample Fixture (as directed by Engineer)
iii. IES Photometric Files
b. Light poles and Foundations

6. Miscellaneous Utility Work

7. Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment
a. Miscellaneous Electrical Parts

8. Drawings
a. Coordination drawing of All Electrical Rooms
b. Conduit layout drawings
c. Duct drawings
D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-4

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 – N ational Electrical Code.

B. ANSIC2 – Natio na l Electrical Safety Code.

C. NEMA – Nationa l Electrical Manufacturer's Assoc.

D. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
E. N
FPA – Nationa l Fire Protection Assoc.

F. IEEE – The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers G. IESNA – Th e Illuminating Engineering Society of North America H. NETA – Inter national Electrical Testing Association I. ISA – Int ernational Society of Automation
J. Recommended Standards for Water Works and Wastewater Facilities as published by Great
Lakes – Upper Mississippi River Board of State Public Health and Environmental Managers.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION/DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE (NOT USED)

1.8 MAINTENANCE/SPARE PARTS (NOT USED)

1.9 EXTENDED WARRANTY (NOT USED)

1.10 WORKING CLEARANCES
A. Working clearances around equipment requiring electrical services shall be verified by Con
tr
actor to comply with Code requirements. Should there be apparent violations of clearances; the Contractor shall notify the Engineer before proceeding with connection or placing of equipment.

B. In the case of panelboards, safety switches and other equipment requiring wire and cable t
erminations, the Contractor shall ascertain that lug sizes and wiring gutters or space allowed for proper accommodation and termination of the wires and cables are adequate.

1.11 WORKMANSHIP
A. Workmanship under this Division shall be accomplished by certified electricians or certi
fi
ed electrician trainee under the direct supervision of certified electricians. Certified electricians and electrician trainees shall be registered with the State of California in addition to any other requirements from local municipalities that work is performed. All work shall be done in keeping with conventions of the trade. Work of

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-5

this Division shall be closely coordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflict and int
erference.

1.12 PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. All electrical equipment and wiring shall be stored in a clean and dry location. Th e location shall be temperature and humidity controlled. All equipment shall be stored per the equipment manufacturer’s published storage requirements and recommendation.

The equipment supplier shall verify that the storage location proposed by the contractor is acceptable to the equipment manufacturer. The contractor shall submit documentation proving that the storage location is acceptable to the manufacturer.

B. All equipment stored outside of the equipment manufacturers published storage guidel
ines shall be replaced at the contractor expense. The contractor shall provide temperature and humidity monitoring equipment in the storage area as part of the proof of acceptable storage.

C. Once equipment is placed in an electrical room, the room must be temperature and hu
midity controlled. In addition, the environment must remain clean and dirt free. Doors and temporary AC units must be installed prior to electrical equipment being placed in the rooms. Recording temperature and humidity gauges will be required in all electrical and process areas with electrical equipment once the equipment is placed.

1.13 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall provide a fully operational electrical service as described in the pl
an
s.

1. Arrange with the utility company for the services and install the services in acco
rdance with their requirements, regulations and recommendations.

1.14 WARRANTY/EXTENDED WARRANTY
A. In accordance with Division 1

1.15 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTS DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain adequate tempo
rary power and lighting at all times during construction, so that the various other trades can accomplish their work in a flawless manner. Particular attention will be given to lighting for masonry, drywall, painting, tile work and any other finish work.

1.16 MATERIAL STANDARDS
A. Material shall be new and comply with standards of Underwriters' Laboratorie s, Inc., where standards have been established for the particular product and the various NEMA, ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, AEIC, IPCEA or other publications referenced.

1.17 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide test equipment and supplies deemed necessary by the Engineer at no extra cost
to
the Owner. Equipment shall have a current certification certificate. These

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-6

supplies shall include but not be limited to the following: volt meters, amp meters, light meter
s, watt meters, harmonic distortion test equipment, thermal image camera, high pot test equipment, power quality analyzers, and oscilloscopes.

B. The test equipment is in addition to any equipment necessary to conduct the testing prescribed
in the project documents.

1.18 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable sections of the Building Code and all local rules, regulations and or
dinances.

B. Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70, 70E & National Electric Safety Code C. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdicti o n.

D. References listed in Paragraph 1.04, this section.

1.19 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. After the electrical installation is complete, deliver to the Engineer the following infor
mation with the request for final inspection.

1. One set of contract drawings marked to show all significant changes in equipment
ratings and locations, alterations in locations of conduit runs, or of any data differing from the contract drawings. This shall include revised or changed panelboard and switchgear schedules.

2. Certificates of final inspection from local authority.

3. A tabulation of all motors listing their respective manufacturer, horsepower, nam
eplate voltage and current, actual running current after installation.

B. The electrical work shall be thoroughly tested to demonstrate that the entire sys tem is in proper working order and in accordance with the plans and specifications. Each motor with its control shall be run as nearly as possible under operating conditions for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate correct alignment, wiring capacity, speed and satisfactory operation. All main switches and circuit breakers shall be operated, but not necessarily at full load. Contractor may be required during final inspection, at the request of the Engineer to furnish test instruments for use during the testing.

1.20 STAFFING
A. The electrical contractor shall designate a certified electrician in charge. The name of thi
s employee shall be provided in writing to the Owner and Engineer.

B. In addition, the contractor shall provide one certified electrician for every electrician tr
ainee used on the project site. This ratio will be randomly verified during construction. In the event that proper supervision of electrical staffing is not present during a random verification, all electrical work will cease until the proper staffing is present. A meeting will be conducted with the Owner and Engineer, to address future staffing on the project site.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-7

1.21 PROCESS EQUIPMENT
A. Provide power and control conductors required by equipment specifications to allow the
m
to function as described.

B. Equipment for which power is not specifically indicated on the plans shall be provided with
power in accordance with the NEC to the nearest panelboard, MCC, or switchboard with adequate capacity to serve said equipment as calculated by the NEC.

1.22 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Provide detailed as-built drawings for the project indicating all power wiri ng.

B. The As-Built drawings shall include detailed drawings of all duct banks, underground condu
it, above ground conduit, motor control centers, PLC control panels, control drawings. These drawings shall indicate exact location of all underground electrical wiring and fiber optic cable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART
3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-8

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS COMMISSIONING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 00-1

SECTION 26 05 00
COM

MISSIONING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section provides the guidelines for testing of electrical equipment, cable, protec
ti
ve relays, circuit breakers, motor control centers, motors, and related apparatus to be used for the site interior and exterior electrical distribution system.

This specification does not release the Contractor or vendor from any further testing required for safe commissioning of the equipment. All tests shall be completely recorded on forms provided at the end of this section. Tests shall be submitted to Engineer and Owner for approval.

B. Contractor will provide and pay the cost of electrical testing by an independent testin
g firm. Testing firm shall have a minimum of five years of experience in providing acceptance testing for electrical systems. Testing shall be performed per the latest InterNational Electric Testing Association Standards (NETA) standard.

This cost will be included in the Contract Base Bid.

C. The Contractor shall immediately correct all deficiencies discovered during testi n g
by the independent firm. The independent testing firm has the final say on the acceptance of the equipment, if testing determines the equipment is deficient, contractor shall be responsible to fix the deficiency even if the manufacturer said the equipment is satisfactory.

D. The Contractor to update the protective device settings with the final power syst em
study acceptance.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Division 26 – E le ctrical

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The testing result shall be summarized in a final report certified by the t es ting technician. Report shall be submitted per Division 1 requirement.

B. The report shall include the following section:

1. Executive Summary.

2. Description, purpose, basis, and scope of the work.

3. Field data sheet showing all visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection done
on the equipment. The data sheet shall show check mark and values of all the testing done, a description of the instrument used for testing.

4. A summary of the deficiency, concern, repairs, and recommendation.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS COMMISSIONING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 00-2

5. A table showing the final settings of all the adjustable equipment tested. 6 . All the testing values shall be in accordance with the latest NETA standa r d.

C. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including par
ts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the Specifications.

D. Submit a letter certifying full and complete compliance with the Specifications, Dr
awings, and other project requirements. The letter shall list any exceptions or deviations from specified requirements, if any and reasons for same. Exceptions or deviation shall also be clearly marked in a separate color in submittals. This shall be included in the NETA report and be prepared by the NETA Test Firm.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. InterNational Electric Testing Association Standards (NETA).

1. ANSI/NETA ATS-2021: Standard for Acceptance Testing Specification for Electri
cal Power Equipment and Systems.

2. ANSI/NETA ECS-2020: Standard for Electrical Commissioni ng Specification for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

1. IEEE Publication No. 141 are hereby made a part of this section, unless otherwise
modified herein.

C. Related equipment specification in all section of Division 26 – Ele ctrical.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing firm shall have a minimum of five years of experience in providing el ectr ical acceptance testing for electrical system. Testing shall be performed per the latest InterNational Electric Testing Association Standards (NETA) standard. This cost will be included in the Contract Bid as part of the electrical installation.

B. The Contractor shall immediately correct all deficiencies discovered during testin g
by the independent firm. The independent testing firm has the final say on the acceptance of the equipment, if testing determine the equipment is deficient, Contractor shall be responsible to fix the deficiency even if the manufacturer said the equipment is satisfactory.

C. The Testing Firm shall be NETA Accredited.

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION / DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE (NOT USED)

1.8 MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PARTS (NOT USED)

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS COMMISSIONING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 00-3

1.9 WARRANTY/EXTENDED WARRANTY (NOT USED)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PAR
T 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Preparatory work.

1. Prior to the testing of any specific piece of equipment, the Contractor shall remove all shipping hardware and inspect for broken or missing parts and proper connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 TESTS
A. All tests shall be supervised by the Engineer/Owner and the contractor. Contractor shall give 30-day’s notice of all scheduled tests to the Engineer/Owner in writing.

B. Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Owner of scheduled dates of electrical equipment
installation completion. Equipment testing shall be coordinated at this time by Contractor with Engineer/Owner and appropriate Manufacturer's Representatives.

C. All testing prescribed in NETA ATS-2021 & ECS-2020 shall be performed by an indepen
dent NETA Firm paid for by the contractor.

3.3 EXECUTION
A. Preparatory Work.

1. Prior to the testing of any specific piece of equipment, the Contractor shall remove all shipping hardware and inspect for broken or missing parts and proper connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.

1. Prior to any electrical testing Contractor shall perform a visual and Mechani
cal inspection as specified in the latest NETA ATS and ECS standards.

3.4 NETA FIELD TESTING
A. Equipment to be NETA inspected and tested:

1. Medium Voltage Switchgear.

2. Medium Voltage Cabling.

3. Medium Voltage Transformers.

4. Generator Switchgear.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS COMMISSIONING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 00-4

5. Switchboards.

6. Panelboards.

7. Low Voltage Transformers.

8. VFD.

9. Soft Starts.

10. RVATS.

11. Ground Rods.

12. Grounding Systems.

13. Motors.

14. Motor Control Centers.

15. Switches.

16. Circuit Breakers.

17. Protective Relays.

18. DC Battery System.

19. Active Harmonic Filtration Units.

20. Harmonic Distortion Testing at the Main Breaker of each switchboard / MC
C.

21. Fiber Optic Cabling.

22. All other electrical equipment installed on the project for which NETA describe
s a test.

B. Inspections and Test to be performed:

1. All visual and mechanical inspections listed in NETA ATS-2021 and NETA ECS
-2020.

2. All electrical test listed in NETA ATS-2021 and NETA ECS-2020.

EN

D OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS COMMISSIONING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 00-5

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 05-1

SECTION 26 05 05
SELE

CTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Section Includes:

1. Removal of existing electrical equipment, wiring, and conduit in areas to be remodeled;
removal of designated construction; dismantling, cutting and alterations for completion of the Work.

2. Disposal of materials.

3. Storage of removed materials.

4. Identification of utilities.

5. Salvaged items.

6. Protection of items to remain as indicated on Drawings.

7. Relocate existing equipment to accommodate construction.

8. The Contractor to update the protective device settings with the final po wer system study acceptance.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Division 1 – G ene ral Provisions
B. Division 26 – El e ctrical
C. Division 40 – Pro cess Interconnections

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate removal sequence and location of salvageable items; loca
ti
on and construction of temporary work. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of capped/spare conduits an d equipment abandoned in place.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED)

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide written workplan for demolition in accordance w ith applicable building code and contract documents to Owner and Engineer for approval.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 05-2

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION / DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE (NOT USED)

1.8 MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PARTS (NOT USED)

1.9 WARRANTY/EXTENDED WARRANTY (NOT USED)

1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Division 1 - Pre-installation meeting.

B.

Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.11 SCHEDULING
A. Division 1 - Requirements for scheduling.

B.

Schedule work to coincide with new construction.

C. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify Engine
er and Owner. Do not resume operations until directed.

1.12 COORDINATION
A. Division 1 – R equi rements for coordination.

B. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building area
s.

C. Coordinate demolition work with facility operation.

D. Coordinate and sequence demolition so as not to cause shutdown of operation of surrounding areas.

E. Shut-down Periods:

1. Arrange timing of shut-down periods of in-service panels with Owner and Engine
er. Do not shut down any utility without prior written approval.

2. Keep shut-down period to minimum or use intermittent period as directed by Owner
and Engineer.

3. Maintain life-safety systems in full operation in occupied facilities or pro vi de written notice minimum 3 days in advance.

F. Identify salvage items in cooperation with Owner.

1. Coordinate with the owner for items to be salvaged.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 05-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 E X

AMINATION
A. Division 1 - Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B.

Verify wiring and equipment indicated to be demolished serve only abandoned faci
lities.

C. Verify termination points for demolished services.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Erect, and maintain temporary safeguards, including warning signs and lights, bar
ri
cades, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor's employees, and existing improvements to remain.

B. Temporary egress signage and emergency lighting

3.3 DEMOLITION
A. Carefully coordinate Work specified in this Article to avoid duplication in other s
ections.

B. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.

Report discrepancies to Owner/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit in accordance with contract drawings., D. Remove conduit, wire, boxes, and fastening devices to avoid any interference with new installation.

E. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for remov a l.

F. Reconnect equipment being disturbed by renovation work and required for continu
e service to nearest available panel.

G. Disconnect or shut off service to areas where electrical work is to be removed.

Remove elect
rical fixtures, equipment, and related switches, outlets, conduit and wiring which are not part of final project.

H. Install temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction.

I. Perform work on energized equipment or circuits with experienced and trained personne
l. Any work on energized equipment or circuits will require a “Energized Work Permit” through coordination with the owner.

J. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new cons
truction.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 05-4

K. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
w
ork.

L. Remove exposed abandoned grounding and bonding components, fasteners and support
s, and electrical identification components, including abandoned components above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut embedded support elements flush with walls and floors.

M. Clean and repair existing equipment to remain.

N. Protect and retain power to existing active equipment remaining.

O. Cap abandoned empty conduit at both ends in accordance with contract dr a wings.

3.4 EXISTING PANELBOARDS
A. Ring out circuits in existing panel affected by the Work. Where additional circuit s are needed, reuse circuits available for reuse. Install new breakers. Contractor to coordinate with the owner to install circuit breakers in panels that are energized.

B. Tag unused circuits as spare.

C. Where existing circuits are indicated to be reused, use sensing measuring devices to veri
fy circuits feeding Project are or are not in use.

D. Remove existing wire no longer in use from panel to equipment.

E. Provide new updated directories for all panelboards, switchboards, and MCCs where circui
ts have been modified or rewired.

F. Close all unused openings and breaker spaces with listed means for the appl
ication.

3.5 SALVAGE ITEMS
A. Remove and protect items to be salvaged and turn over to Owner.

3.6 REUSABLE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Carefully remove equipment, materials, or fixtures which are to be reuse d .

B. Disconnect, remove, or relocate existing electrical material and equipment interfe
ring with new installation.

C. Relocate existing lighting fixtures as indicated on Drawings. Clean fixtur es and re- lamp. Test fixture to see if it is in good working condition before installation at new location.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Division 1 - Requirements for cleaning.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 05-5
B. Remove demolished materials as work progresses. Legally dispose.

C.

Keep work areas neat, clean and free of additional hazards.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Division 1 - Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B.

Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-1

SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-V

OLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemen- tary
C
onditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 26 – Ele ctrical.

2. Division 40 – Pr oce ss Interconnections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. VFD: Variable-frequency drive.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer's authorized service representative.

B.

Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated, and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying con- duct
or
with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked f
or intended location and use.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-2

2. C
onductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's
"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors.

D
. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2. Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83. 3 . Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, mate
ri
al, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. Switchboard, Switchgear, Panelboard, MCC, and other distribution equipment feeders shall not be spliced.

B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set s
crew
s, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.

C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper.

2. Type: Two hole with long barrels.

3. Termination: Compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper; stranded for No. 12 AWG min.

B.

Branch Circuits: Copper; stranded for No. 12 AWG min.

C. VFD Output Circuits Cable:

1. Conductor Material: Copper.

2. Phase Conductors: 3.

3. Ground Conductors: 3 segmented ground wire = 100% of phase conductor.

4. Cable Insulation: XLPE – Cr oss -linked Polyethylene Insulation.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-3

5. Overall Jacket Insulation: PVC.

6. Rating: TC XLPE.

7. Shield: Helical Copper.

8. Voltage Rating: 1000V.

D. Power-Limited Control: Stranded for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIO N S AND

WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

B.

Lighting and Receptacles in buildings: Type THWN-2/MTW, single conductors in race
way.

C. Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW-2 single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, an d Underground: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord w ith stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

F. VFD Output Circuits: VFD rated cables in conduit.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in racew ays in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. C
omplete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points ac- cording t
o Division 26 – Electrical prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; com- pound use
d must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufactur- er's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members
and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Division 26.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-4

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque
-t
ightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material an d that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum cond
uctors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6-inches of s l ack.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 for “Fire-Al arm System" for connecting, ter- minating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26.

B.

Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of ot her end of conductor and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATI O NS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wal l assemblies.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Have a NETA Testing Firm perform test on all new Service Entrance Conductors. (
Service Entrance Conductors are defined as the new 240V conductors between the Utility transformers and the associated Service Equipment.) B. All other required low voltage conductor testing shall be performed by the E l ectrical Contractor per NETA Standards.

C. Megger all cables and provide test data as a submittal.

D. Perform tests and inspections.

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has bee n en
ergized, test service entrance and feeder conductors and conductors feed- ing the following critical equipment and services for compliance with require- ments:

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-5

a. All Switchboards, Panelboards, MCCs, Motor Starters, Process Equ
ipment
, UL 508A Control Panels, and feeder or branch circuits over 50 amps.

3. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:
a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct
connection according to the single-line diagram.
b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:
1) A
low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.
c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and inde
ntation.
d. Inspect for correct identification.
e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.
f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductor
s. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration. g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.
h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

4. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Ac - ceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperatu
re or to detect significant deviations from normal values.

Provide calibration record for device.
b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switche
s checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and ins p ections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-6

3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achi
eve
compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-7

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-1

SECTION 26 05 23
CON

TROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con
dit
ions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Backboards.

2. Category 6 balanced twisted pair cable.

3. Low-voltage control cabling.

4. Control-circuit conductors.

5. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B.

Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less t han 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more ai r ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency, layout technician, installation supervisor, or fiel
d inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 P E

RFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP
A
70, by a qualified testing agency, and listed for intended location and application.

B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products accordi
ng to NFPA 262, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Travel Distance: 60-inches (1520 mm) or less.

2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.

3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determ
ined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.

D. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non- Plenum
Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.

2.2 BACKBOARDS
A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96-inches .

B. Painting: Paint plywood on all sides and edges with flat white alkyd pai nt.

2.3 CATEGORY 6 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, with internal spline, certif i ed to meet transmission characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz.

B. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 fo r Category 6 cables.

C. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.

D. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).

E. Cable Rating: Plenum.

F. Jacket: Blue thermoplastic.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch lengths; terminated with an eigh
t-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure per
formance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-3

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

H.

Plugs and Plug Assemblies:

1. Male; eight position; color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed
for termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded balanced twisted pair cable.

2. Comply with IEC 60603-7-1, IEC 60603-7-2, IEC 60603-7-3, IEC 60603-7-4, and IEC 60603-7.5.

3. Marked to indicate transmission performance.

I. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:

1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for t
ermination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded balanced twisted pair cable.

2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate.

3. Standards:
a. Category 5e, unshielded balanced twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC
60603-7-2.
b. Category 5e, shielded balanced twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC
60603-7-3.
c. Category 6, unshielded balanced twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC
60603-7-4.
d. Category 6, shielded balanced twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC
60603-7.5.
e. Category 6a, unshielded balanced twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC
60603-7-41.
f. Category 6a, shielded balanced twisted pair cable shall comply with IEC
60603-7.51.

4. Marked to indicate transmission performance.

J. Faceplate:

1. Four port, vertical single-gang faceplates designed to mount to single-gang wall bo
xes.

2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel complying with requirements in Division 26.

3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of balanced twisted pair,
optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-4

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

K.

Legend:

1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

2. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.4 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Paired Cable:

1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductor s.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Shielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

2.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type XHHW-2, complying with UL 44 in raceway.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type XHHW-2, complying with UL 44 in raceway.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type XHHW-2, complyi
ng with UL 44 in raceway.

D. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Crit
ical Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable.

1. Control circuits.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 E X

AMINATION
A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 for Raceways and Boxes for raceway selectio
n an
d installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2-inches (50 mm) wide, 3-inches (75 mm) hi
gh, and 2-1/2-inches (64 mm) deep.

2. Outlet boxes for cables shall be no smaller than 4-inches (102 mm) square by 2-1/8-
inches (53 mm) deep with extension ring.

3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of be nds between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

D. R
aceway Installation in Equipment Rooms:

1. Secure conduits to Unistrut if entering the room from overhead.

2. Extend conduits 3-inches (75 mm) above finished floor.

3. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor
to grounding system.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.

B.

General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling System s ."

3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make termi
nations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

4. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, cables shall not be spliced and shall be continu
ous from terminal to terminal. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-6

5. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway.

Instal
l
network cabling and control wiring and cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different systems or different voltages.

6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30-inches (760 mm) and not m
ore than 6-inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufact
urer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and
discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.

Do not u
se heat lamps for heating.

10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabli ng Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.

11. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles.

12. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed
so as to not damage cables.

13. Provide strain relief.

14. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminals. Do not bend cables i
n a radius less than 10 times the cable OD. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners and through penetrations.

15. Ground wire shall be copper, and grounding methods shall comply with IEE
E C2. Demonstrate ground resistance.

C. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways.

2. Use insulated spade lugs for wire and cable connection to screw terminals .

3. Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for E
lectrical Systems."
D. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-D recommendations for separating unshielde
d copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-7

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic race
ways
and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5-inch
es (127 mm).
b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minim
um of 12-inches (305 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24-
inches (600 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielde
d power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2-
inches (64 mm).
b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minim
um of 6-inches (150 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12-
inches (305 mm).

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and pow
er lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minim
um of 3-inches (75 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6-i
nches (150 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transforme
rs, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48-inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minim
um of 5-inches (127 mm).

3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.

2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 18 AWG.

3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG .

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-8

3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 - Penetration and Firestoppin g .

B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.

3.6 GROUNDING
A. For data communication wiring, comply with TIA-607-B and with BIC S I TDMM, "Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26.

B.

Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA
-606-B; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with UL 969.

C. Identify each wire on each end and at each terminal with a number-coded identification t
ag. Each wire shall have a unique tag.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified BICSI certified t ec hnician to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings.

Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA- 568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment
and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination, but not after cross- connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA- 568-
C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in its "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in its "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-9

qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test con
figuration.

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary rep ort that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-10

THIS PAGE INTENTIALLY BLANK

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-1

SECTION 26 05 26
GRO

UNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con
dit
ions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

B.

Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special
applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding.

2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.

3. Foundation steel electrodes.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned locations of grounding features speci
fi
ed in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells.

2. Ground rods.

3. Ground rings.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervi s or.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and m
aintenan
ce manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Division 1, include the following:
a
. Plans showing as-built, dimensioned locations the following:

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-2

1) Test wells.
2)
Ground rods.
3) Ground rings.
b. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test w el
ls and grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NFPA 70B.
1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain w
ithin specified maximums, and instructions shall
recommend corrective action if values do not.
2) Include recommended testing intervals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP
A
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipmen t .

2.2 MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED)

2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise req
uir
ed by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8.

2. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33.

3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4-inch (6 mm) in diameter.

4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules;
1-5/8-inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) thick.

6. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with coppe
r ferrules; 1-5/8-inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4-inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8-inches (28

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-3

mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in swit
chboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ap
plications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufact
urer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

C. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, wit h dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

D. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper, or copper alloy.

E. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

F. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with h e x head bolt.

G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

H. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial termi na l with set screw.

I. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long- stud l
engths, capable of single and double conductor connections.

J. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex he ad screw.

K. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A.

L. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for di r ect burial.

M. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts.
a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy.
b. Listed for direct burial.

2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector rated for direct bu
rial.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-4

A. Ground Rods: Section Copper-clad steel; 3/4-inch by 10-feet. Provide sectio ns as required to supply minimum length as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 16 AWG and smaller, and stranded condu
ctor
s for No. 14 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG m
inimum.

1. Bury at least 24-inches (750 mm) below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Install tinned 4/0 Bare Copper counterpoise in all
concrete encased duct banks.

C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation.

D. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with more than one continu
ous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

E. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment,
and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2-inches (50 mm) minimum from wall,
6-inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

F. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded or mechanical connectors.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be conne
cted
to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-5

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or hand
hol
e floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4-inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat- shrunk insulating sleeve from 2-inches (50 mm) above to 6-inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as insert
s, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install one ground rod and bond to the du ct
bank counterpoise entering and leaving the equipment. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with them.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch cir c uits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition t
o those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. All control conduits.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mou
nted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate i nsulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat- tracing cable.

Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-6

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding condu
ctor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwi
se indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 an
d UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2-inches (50 mm) below finished fl oor or final
grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwi
se indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. Use exothermic welds or mechanical connections for all below-grade conn
ections.

3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one- rod l
ength from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole.

1. I
nstall at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the
ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-7

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and mai
ntenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking car e not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:

Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connecti
on is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit
, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug- type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water m
eters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.

G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associ
ated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column
and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60-feet (18 m) apart.

I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building st
ructure ground rod and to each steel column, panels, skids and gear, extending around the perimeter of building.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and for t
aps to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24-inches (600 mm) from building's foun d ation.

J. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minim
ized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make con
tact points closer in order of galvanic series.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-8

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechani
cal clamps.

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and m
echanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent fu
ture penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a NETA testing agency to perform test s and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been en
ergized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted
, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistan
ce level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of preci
pitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground- rod a
ssembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests an d

inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less:
10 ohm
s.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS GROUDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-9

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA
:
5 ohms.

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000
kVA: 3 ohms.

4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment
: 3 ohm(s).

5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values,
notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 -1

SECTION 26 05 29
HAN

GERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con
dit
ions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Slotted support systems.

2. Conduit and cable support devices.

3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.

4. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.

5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,
mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods.

6. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components an
d profiles, and finishes for the following:
a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories.
b. Clamps.
c. Hangers.
d. Sockets.
e. Eye nuts.
f. Fasteners.
g. Anchors.
h. Saddles.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 -2

i. Brackets.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. For fabrication an
d installation details for electrical hangers and support systems.

1. Hangers. Include product data for components.

2. Slotted support systems.

3. Equipment supports.

4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachmen
ts to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems. 1 . Include design calculations and details of hangers.

2. Include design calculations for seismic restraints.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ductwork, piping, fittings, and supports.

2. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached.

3. I
tems penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Luminaires.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Access panels.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personn e l according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 -3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 P E

RFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agen
cy.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1.

2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with m i nimum 13/32-inch- (10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8-inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one surface.

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field asse
mbly.

2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: 304 stainless steel for all non- air
conditioned areas. Galvanized steel for all airconditioned spaces.

3. Channel Width: 1-5/8-inches (41.25 mm).

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: 304 stainless steel hangers, clamps, and associated f
ittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisti ng of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.

Body shall be made of malleable iron.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A36/A36M steel pl ates , shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical item s or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement conc
rete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, 304 stainless steel, for use in ha r
dened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Concrete Inserts: 304 stainless steel.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suit
able for attached structural element.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 -4

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with AS
TM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 (Grade A325M).

6. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded 304 stainless steel.

2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to f i t dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel sha
pes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hang
ers an
d supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA 1.

2. NECA 101

3. NECA 102.

4. NECA 105.

5. NECA 111.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26.

C
. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space support
s for raceways as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4-inch (6 mm) in diameter.

D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamp s.

E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be use d for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specifi ed in this article.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 -5

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC may be suppo
rt
ed by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so streng
th will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fas
ten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with
lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4-inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight- aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4-inches (100 mm) thick.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with M
SS SP-69.

6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinet
s, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need
for reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 for Metal Fabrications for site- fab
ri
cated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases not less than 4-inches larger in both directions than suppo
rt
ed unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 -6
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, rei
nforce
ment, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3 Cast-in- Place Concrete.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufact
urer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to support
ed equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written inst
ructions.

3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas i
mm
ediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 for cleaning and touchup painting
of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply ga
lvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-1

SECTION 26 05 33
RAC

EWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con
dit
ions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.

3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

4. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 40 – Pr oce ss Interconnections

2. Division 26 – Ele ctrical.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum Rigid Conduit.

B.

GRC: Galvanized Rigid steel Conduit.

C. RNC: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover encl
osures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, an
d attachment details.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the fol l owing items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-2

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups wit
h
common supports.

B. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit:

1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.

2. RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

3. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. a. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Robroy.
2) Plasti-Bond.
3) Perma-cote.
4) Korkap.
5) Ocal.
6) Gafco Industries.
b. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
c. C
oating Thickness: 0.040-inch (1 mm), minimum.

4. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

B. Metal Fittings:

1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified t
esting agency, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, an d use.

4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA

70. 5. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, r
ated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-3

6. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0. 04 0-inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

C. Joint Compound for GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authoriti e s having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Nonmetallic Conduit:

1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in N
FPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Fiberglass: (Ow ner approval required for any use of fiberglass conduit.) a. Comply with NEMA TC 14.
b.

Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways.

3. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unl ess otherwise indicated.

4. LFMFC: Comply with UL 360.

5. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

6. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

7. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D
3485.

8. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14. (Ow ner approval required for any use of RTRC conduits.)
B. Nonmetallic Fittings:

1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

2. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or t ubing type and material.

3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinet
s installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD,
with gasketed cover.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-4

C. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighi ng 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

D. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast
aluminum with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as rece
ssed box.

F. Device Box Dimensions: 4-inches square by 2-1/8-inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm de
ep).

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 12 with continu
ous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Stainless Steel, 304.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass.

H. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 12 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and r
emovable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualif
ied testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as
defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined i n NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Inground boxes shall be AASHTO 20 concrete with galvanized steel lids.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-5

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES (NOT U S ED) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 R A

CEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors and Process Equipment Area in non-airconditioned building: Apply raceway products
as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: RGS (Rigid Galvanized Steel), PVC-coated rigid steel conduit
(PVC RGS), SCH 80 PVC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground (embedded in concrete slabs or structures):

SCH
40 PVC with rigid steel stub-ups. Steel conduit stub-ups embedded in concrete shall be wrapped with 2 layers of 3M Rubber Splicing Tape 130C.

3. Underground Sing le Conduits (1 pipe): RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC (non- concrete encased) with marker tape. {No n -Concrete Encased Electrical Ducts require prior approval from the owner and engineer.} a. All medium voltage ducts must be concrete encased and reinforced.
b. All low voltage feeders must be concrete encased and reinforced. c. All fiber optic cables must be concrete encased and reinforced. d. Only branch circuits and control loops to a single instrument are able to be considered for non-concrete encasement.

4. Underground Conduits (more than 1 conduit going in a single direction): RNC, Type
E
PC-40-PVC direct burial in a duct bank configuration with locating tape 12” above top conduit.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumati
c, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 4X, 304 Stainless Steel

7. B
oxes 6” x 6 ” and larger shall be hinged.

B. Indoor air-conditioned area: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherw
ise in
dicated:

1. Exposed Indoors in Dry Locations: GRC or ARC.

2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumati
c, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. LFMC shall also be used where process equipment or piping containing fluid is located.

3. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-6

4. Boxes 6” x 6” and larger shall be hinged.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1 ” .

D.

Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and locat ion.

1. Rigid Conduits: Use threaded rigid conduit fittings matching the material of the conduit system.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with thi s type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply w
ith NEMA FB 2.20. (Only LFMC is acceptable.)
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum r
aceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 for hangers and supports.

B.

Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requir
ements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

C. Install non-hardening electricians duct seal in all conduits terminating into panels, encl
osures, racks, equipment, and similar equipment; and in all conduits transitioning from below grade or transitioning from outdoor to indoor location, and similar locations.

Duct seal shall fully close off entry of moisture. Install in each conduit to a depth of 3/4” for conduits less than 2” in size and to 1.5” for conduits 2” and larger.

D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a roof.

E. Keep raceways at least 6-inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues an d steam
or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished sl ab.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-7

H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12-inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.

I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according
to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.

J. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

K. Support conduit within 12-inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attach ed.

L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right an gles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals.

2. Change from PVC to GRC or ARC before rising above floor.

3. Provide expansion fitting each conduit.

M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:

Appl
y listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.

Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

N. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conducti ve compound prior to assembly.

O. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bu
shings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs at all boxes and cabinets. Install bushings
on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

Q. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with threaded “Myer
s Hub.” Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

R. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coating
s in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

S. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and l
arger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

T. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with
not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12-inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-8

U. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend po
ints.

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not e
xceeding 48-inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

V. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and NFPA 820. Fi
ll sealing fittings with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

W. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fitt
ings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

2. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building.

3. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment.

4. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain di
fferent pressure set points.

5. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

X. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

Y. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperatu
re change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight- run length that exceeds 25-feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground GRC, ARC, and PVC Coated GRC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight- run length that exceeds 100-feet (30 m).

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for
each of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) te
mperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperatu
re change.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-9

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation:
125 deg F
(
70 deg C) temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041- inch
per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078-inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or struct
ure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected acco r
ding to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Z. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36 -inches (915 mm) of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC for all locations.

2. Only LFMC is acceptable.

AA. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not ind
ivi
dually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

BB. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry
block and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

CC. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same vert
ical channel.

DD. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two fram
ing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

EE. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do no t support boxes by conduits.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-10

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare tr
ench
bottom as specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6-inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in accordance with other contract documents.

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work tow
ard end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength.

After placing controlled backfill to within 12-inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 31 00 2000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at buildi
ng entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured SCH 80 PVC conduit elbows with threaded adaptor and transi
tion to RGS or PVC RGS as required for location for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose and encase
coupling with 3-inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12-inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where
conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60-inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12-inches (300 mm) above direct-
buried conduits but a minimum of 6-inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Iden
tification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coor
dina
ted with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded fr
om 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1-inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-11

D. Install handholes with 24 ” of No. 67 coarse aggregate.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and i
nsulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instruct
ions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIO NS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assembli es.

Install accessible fitting or junction box within 12” of penetration or first fitting (whichever is nearest penetration). Install listed sealing compound to prevent ingress and condensation in accordance with NEC.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assem b lies.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deteriorati o n.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manu
facturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-12

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-1

SECTION 26 05 43
UND

ERGROUND SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install a complete underground system of raceways, manholes and hand
hol
es as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, includi ng General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Other sections that may relate to the work in this section include, but a re not limited to, the following:

1. Division 1 – Gen eral

2. Division 26 – Ele ctrical

3. Division 40 – Proce ss Interconnections

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit per Division 1 – G eneral Provisions, and Section 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Requirements
B. Submit shop drawings and product data, for the following:

1. Manholes, handholes and associated hardware.

2. Underground Ducts.

3. Concrete Backfill.

4. Plastic duct spacers.

C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnishe d under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned unreviewed.

D. Provide manhole and handhole NEC sizing calculations for all manholes and handhol
es used on the project. Sizing calculations shall be provided with initial submittal.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-2

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shal
l
be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted):

1. NFPA 70 – Natio na l Electrical Code (NEC)

2. NFPA 70E – Stan dard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace

3. ASTM A615/A615M-06a – Stan dard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for concrete Reinforcement

4. ASTM A48 – Stan dard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

5. ASTM A536 – St an dard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

6. AASHTO M306-04/ ASTM A48 – Drai nage Structure Castings, Section 7.0 Proof Load Testing

7. ASTM C-850 – Spe cifications for underground precast concrete utility structures B. All excavation, trenching, and related sheeting, braci ng, etc., as shown on the Drawings and listed in these Specifications, shall comply with the following standards (unless otherwise noted):

1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) a. Excavation safety standards (29 CFR Part 1926.650 Subpart P) - Exca
vation.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM D 698a – Stan dard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600kN- m/m3)).

C. All equipment specified in this section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate lab
el of Underwriters Laboratories.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and eq
uipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.

B. The precast manholes shall be manufactured in a NPCA (National Precast Concrete Associatio
n) Certified Plant.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-3

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION/DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instruc tions.

B. Protect equipment and materials from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly clean and dry
until installation.

1.8 MAINTENANCE/SPARE PARTS (NOT USED)

1.9 WARRANTY/EXTENDED WARRANTY
A. Base Warranty per Division 1.

1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes wi t h final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Raceways

1. Raceways shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit Schedule 40 as manufact
ured by Carlon; An Indian Head Co.; Kraloy Products Co., Inc.; Highland Plastics Inc. Thinwall conduit designated for encased burial as (Type EB) is not acceptable for any application.

2. All underground raceways of the underground system, terminating in manholes or ha nd
holes shall use bell end fittings of the same size and type as the raceway. Bell ends and duct spacers shall be as manufactured by Carlon.

3. Where raceways terminate into existing and new manholes, handholes or struct
ures which have flanged threaded couplers in the wall of the manhole or structure, threaded splice bars 24 inches in length shall be installed in all of the existing threaded couplers for that bank, and the threaded splice bars lapped into the duct bank steel for the last 24 inches length of the duct bank, and tied to the duct bank reinforcing steel at the end for that length.

4. Where raceways terminate into existing manholes, handholes or structures which do
not have flanged threaded couplers in the wall of the manhole or structure, the bank duct reinforcing steel shall be dowelled into the existing structure, manhole or handhole wall at least ½ of the wall thickness, and

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-4

secured with epoxy compound. The last 10’ of the duct bank reinforcing shall be on
e bar size larger than shown for the encasement reinforcing.

5. All new manholes and handholes shall be provided with threaded splice bars, setting
bars, and threaded rebar couplers, as manufactured by Meadow Burke Inc., Tampa, FL. for overlapping the duct bank reinforcing steel with screwlock couplers.

6. All transition from below grade duct system to above grade conduit shall be made vi
a rigid metallic conduit. For corrosive area, this transition shall be via PVC coated galvanized rigid metal conduit. For non-corrosive area, the transition shall be made via galvanized rigid conduit.

B. M
anholes and Handholes

1. General
a. Manholes and handholes shall be of the precast concret e type, designed for a Class H20 load with sizes as shown on the Drawings, and as manufactured by Oldcastle Precast.

2. Construction
a. Concrete for manholes and handholes shall have a 28-day compressive streng
th of 5000 PSI. Cement shall be Type 1 or III. Reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 with yield strength of 60,000 P.S. Design loadings shall be H-20-44 w/impact.
b. Duct bank entries into the manhole or handhole shall be centered on the enterin
g wall.
c. Where present or future duct banks are shown to terminate at a manhole or h
andhole, the terminating area of the manhole wall within the confines of the duct bank steel reinforcing shall be recessed approximately 1-1/2” for shear support, with beveled edges, all as shown on the Drawings. d. Each manhole and handhole shall have a 18” x 1 8”
x 24” deep concrete
sump in one corner of the manhole or handhole.

3. Manhole Covers
a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, manhole and handhole covers
shall be heavy duty 36 in. machined gray iron, and AASHTO M306-04/ ASTM A48 CL35B Min., 40,000-pound proof load value (Class H20 X 2.5) “True Traffic” load covers, complete with frame, and “MV Electric”, “Electric”, “Control”, or “Communication” raised lettering recessed flush, as required, on the cover. Covers shall be V-1600-5, with drop handles as manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works, Ardmore, OK.
b. All castings shall be made In the USA, cast with the foundry’s name, part
number, “Made in USA”, and production date (example: mm/dd/yy).

Castings without proper markings will be rejected. Manufacturer shall

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-5

certify that all castings conform to the ASTM and AASHTO Designations as spe ci
fied herein. All casting shall be true to pattern in form and dimension, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes and other defects in positions affecting strength and value for the service intended. Angles shall be filleted, and arises shall be sharp and true.

4. Hardware
a. Cable racks shall be of the heavy duty non-metallic type with arm lengths o
f 8”, 14” and 20”, each supporting a load of not less than 250 lbs. at the outer end. Racks shall be molded in one piece of U.L. listed glass reinforced nylon, Catalog CR36N with RA08N, RA14N and RA20N arms as manufactured by Underground Devices Inc.

Northbrook, IL. Cable racks shall have reinforced nylon inserts cast flush in the manhole and handhole walls and the rack secured by 316 stainless steel bolts. Arms for racks shall be vertically spaced not greater than 24” on centers. Furnish inserts for all present and future cable racks as shown on the Drawings.
b. Pulling irons shall be of copolymer polypropylene coated ½” di a. cable,
tensile strength rated at 270,000 psi, with polyethylene pulling iron pocket, all recessed in the manhole wall opposite each duct entry.

Pulling irons for handholes shall have the pulling iron located in the floor of the handhole near the center of the handhole opposite the duct entry.

Pulling irons shall be as manufactured by M.A. Industries, Inc.

Peachtree, GA. or Bowco Industries, Portland OR.
c. Each manhole shall have a ¾ x 10’ copper clad ground rod inserted through
the floor of the manhole or handhole, and epoxy sealed. Provide a #4/0 bare tinned bare copper conductor ring around the inside perimeter of the manhole. Connect the access hatch, ladder, etc. with a #6 AWG tinned copper conductor.

2.2 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE
A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color: Gray or Engineer approved equal.

2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless othe
rwise indicated.

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having struct
ural load rating consistent with enclosure.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction o f 0.50.

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service.

6. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings
or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-6

7. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with ente r ing ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory- installed
inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of san
d and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of t
he following, or Engineer approved equal:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
c. CDR Systems Corporation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall field verify the routing of all underground duct banks before place
men
t. He shall modify the routing as necessary to avoid underground utilities or above ground objects. Modification or rerouting for the convenience of the Contractor, or to reduce the length of duct run as designed, will not be permitted. The Contractor shall provide any alternate routing of the duct banks to the Owner/Engineer and, after approval, shall proceed with the installation.

B. The Contractor shall saw cut and repair existing pavements above new and modified existing
duct banks. The Contractor shall provide the alternate routing of the duct banks to the Owner/Engineer and after approval shall proceed with the installation.

C. Install raceways to drain away from buildings. Raceways between manholes or handhol
es shall drain toward the manholes or handholes. Raceway slopes shall not be less than 3 in per 100 ft.

D. All underground ducts banks are required to be reinforced concrete duct banks.

E. A #4/0 stranded bare tinned copper ground conductor shall be threaded through the low
er t
ier of duct spacers, as shown on the Drawings, for the full length of each duct run between manholes and handholes, entering the duct bank opening at each manhole, and bonded to the ground rod in the floor of each manhole and handhole.

F. Lay raceway lines in trenches on compacted earth using duct spacers.

G. Use plastic spacers located not more than 3 ft apart to hold raceways in pla ce. Spacers shall provide not less than 2 in clearance between raceways.

H. The minimum cover for raceway banks shall be 24 in unless otherwise permit ted by the Owner/Engineer. Listed Marker tape shall be installed 12” below the surface along the entire run of the underground raceway.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-7

I. Raceway terminations at all manholes, existing and new, s hall be with end bells for PVC conduit.

J. Where bends in raceways greater than 15 degrees are required, use long radius elbows,
sweeps and offsets of PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit.

K. All ducts shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture during const r uction.

Duxseal shall be used in all applications. Plugging with tape is prohibited, even for a temporary time.

L. Where raceways enter or exit the Underground System, and the raceways rise to a higher el
evation upon entering or leaving the System, such raceways shall be tightly sealed at the higher elevation, both before and after the installation of cables, such that there shall be no entry of water or moisture to the Underground System at any time.

M. No wire shall be pulled until the duct system has been completed in eve r y detail.

N. Swab all raceways clean before installing cable.

O. Train cables in manholes and handholes and support and restrain them on cab le racks.

All cables passing manhole duct entrances in the manhole or handhole shall pass above all duct entrances. No cable shall pass in front of or below duct bank entrances.

3.2 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. The excavation shall extend to the width and depth as shown on the Drawings, or as specif
ied, and shall provide suitable room for installing manholes, handholes, ducts and appurtenances.

B. Furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports.

C. Excavation shall include material of every description and of whatever substance encountered
, regardless of the methods or equipment required to remove the material.

Pavement shall be cut with a saw, wheel or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before excavating.

D. The Contractor shall strip and stockpile topsoil from grassed areas crossed by tre n ches.

At the Contractor’s option, topsoil may be otherwise disposed of and replaced, when required, with approved topsoil of equal quality.

E. While excavating and backfilling is in progress, traffic shall be maintained, and all utiliti
es and other property protected, as provided for in the Contract Documents.

F. Materials shall be excavated to the depth indicated on the Drawings and in widths sufficien
t for installing manholes and laying the ducts. Coordinate the trench width the Details shown on the Drawings. The bottom of the excavations shall be firm and dry in all respects acceptable to the Owner/Engineer. Trench width shall be a practical minimum, but not less than 6 inches greater than the total duct section arrangement, including reinforcing steel.

G. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed
state of subgrade soils. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below, the designated subgrade, provided that material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no more than slightly disturbed. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-8

or otherwise unsatisfactory as a result of inadequate excavation, dewatering or other constr
uction methods, shall be removed and replaced by gravel fill, of aggregate as specified in Division 3, as required by the Owner/Engineer at the Contractor’s expense.

3.3 EXCAVATION BELOW GRADE AND REFILL
A. Regardless of the nature of unstable material encountered, or the groundwater condi
ti
ons, trench and excavation drainage shall be complete and effective.

B. If deemed necessary by the Owner/Engineer, or as shown on the Drawings, the Contr
actor shall be required to deposit pea gravel for duct bedding or gravel refill for excavation below grade, directly on the bottom of the trench immediately after excavation has reached the proper depth and before the bottom of the trench has become softened or disturbed by any cause whatsoever. All excavation shall be made in open trenches. Gravel used for this purpose, shall be aggregate as specified in Division 3, with a maximum coarse aggregate size of ¾ inch.

3.4 BACKFILLING
A. Remove from the excavation all materials which the Owner/Engineer may deem unsui
tab
le for backfilling.

B. Backfilling shall not commence until, not less than 48 hrs. after placing of any concrete embedment, have lapsed.

C. Where the duct banks are laid in the yard, the remainder of the trench, after concrete en
casement, shall be filled with common fill material, void of rock or other non-porous material, in layers not to exceed 8-in in loose measure and compacted to 90% standard Proctor density at optimum moisture content of +/- 4%. The backfill shall be mounded 6-in above the existing grade or as directed by the Owner/Engineer. Where a grass, loam or gravel surface exists prior to excavations in the yard, it shall be removed, conserved and replaced to the full original depth as part of the work under the duct items. In some areas it may be necessary to remove excess material during the cleanup process, so that the ground may be restored to its original level and condition.

D. Where the ductbanks are laid in paved areas or designated future paved areas, existing or de
signated future structures, or other existing or future utilities, the remainder of the trench above the encasement, shall be backfilled with select common fill or select fill material in layers not to exceed 8-inches loose measure and compacted at optimum moisture content
E. (+/- 3%) to 95 percent standard Proctor density. The top 18-inches below subgrade level
shall be compacted at optimum moisture content (+/- 3%) to 100 percent of standard Proctor density.

F. Compaction shall be by use of hand or pneumatic tamping with tools w ei ghing at least 20 lbs. The material being spread and compacted shall be placed in layers not over 8- in loose thick. If necessary, sprinkling shall be employed in conjunction with rolling or ramming.

G. Bituminous paving shall not be placed in backfill.

H. Water jetting will not be accepted as a means of consolidating or compacti ng backfill.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-9

I. All road surfaces shall be broomed and hose-cleaned immediately after backfilli ng .

Dust control measures shall be employed at all times.

3.5 RESTORING TRENCH AND ADJACENT SURFACES
A. In paved areas, the edge of the existing pavement to be removed shall be cut along str
aigh
t lines, and the pavement replaced with the same type and quality of the existing paving.

B. In sections where the ductbank passes through grassed areas, the Contractor shall, at his ow
n expense, remove and replace the sod, or shall loam and reseed the surface to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the underground system.

Remove
dir
t, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of manholes, handholes and structures, using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 26 05 43-10

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1

SECTION 26 05 53
IDE

NTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Con
dit
ions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs.
2 . Labels.

3. Bands and tubes.

4. Tapes and stencils.

5. Tags.

6. Signs.

7. Cable ties.

8. Paint for identification.

9. Fasteners for labels and signs.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components an
d profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate composition, size, colors, lettering style,
mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components t
o be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 P E

RFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B.

Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Comply with NFPA 70E requirements for arc-flash warning labels.

F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks use
d by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperatu
re changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

B. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Match existing
site color code for ungrounded and grounded conductors. In the instance that no color code exists, use the colors listed below for service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied for sizes No. 1/0 AWG and smaller. Color may be fi
eld applied for wires size 1/0 AWG and larger on black wires only.

2. Colors for 240/120-V Circuits as shown below or match existing site color code
:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minim
um distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

4. Color for Neutral: White or Grey.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-3

5. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green.

6. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with two or more yellow stripes.

C. Warning Label Colors:

1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the followi ng legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT
OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36
INCHES (915 MM)."
E. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Black letters on a white field.

2.3 LABELS
A. Self Adhesive Labels shall not be used.

2.4 TUBES
A. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed ide
ntificat
ion labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.

2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS
A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit ide
ntificat
ion legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less t ha n 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

C. Tape and Stencil: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) cen ters placed diagonally over orange background and are 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-4

D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure- se nsitive vinyl tape, with [black and white] [yellow and black] stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

E. Underground-Line Warning Tape:

1. Tape:
a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitabl
e to identify and locate underground electrical and
communications utility lines.
b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operation
s.
c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation w
hen exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive
substances commonly found in soils.

2. Color and Printing:
a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI
Z535.5.
b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HI GH VOLTAGE".
c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE
, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE".

3. Tag: Type I:
a. Pigmented polyolefin, bright colored, compounded for direct-burial serv
ice.
b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
c. Thickness: 4 mils (0.1 mm).
d. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9.0 kg/100 sq. m).
e. Tensile according to ASTM D882: 30 lbf (133.4 N) and 2500 psi (17.2 MPa)
.

4. Tag: Type II:
a. Multilayer laminate, consisting of high-density polyethylene scrim coated
with pigmented polyolefin; bright colored, compounded for direct- burial service.
b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
c. Thickness: 12 mils (0.3 mm).
d. Weight: 36.1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (17.6 kg/100 sq. m).

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-5

e. Tensile according to ASTM D882: 400 lbf (1780 N) and 11,500 psi (79.2 MP
a).

5. Tag: Type ID:
a. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin
film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright colored, compounded for direct-burial service.
b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
c. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).
d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).
e. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).
f. Tensile according to ASTM D882: 70 lbf (311.3 N) and 4600 psi (31.7
MPa).

6. Tag: Type IID:
a. Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented
woven scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear
protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright-colored, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
c. Overall Thickness: 8 mils (0.2 mm).
d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).
e. Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft. (16.6 kg/100 sq. m).
f. Tensile according to ASTM D882: 300 lbf (1334 N) and 12,500 psi (86.1 MPa).

F. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm).

2.6 TAGS
A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), w ith stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.023 inch (0.58 mm) thick, color- coded
for phase and voltage level, with factory printed permanent designations; punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

C. Write-on Tags:

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-6

1. Polyester Tags: 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cabl
e ti
e for attachment.

2. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag m
anufacturer.

2.7 SIGNS

3. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recom
mended by printer manufacturer.

A. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, high-intensity reflective, punched or drilled for fasteners,
with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with

0.0396-inch
(1-mm) galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Engraved legend.

2. Thickness:
a. For signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thic
k.
b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick . c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets
in corners for mounting.
e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicab
le equipment.

2.8 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, an
d Type 6/6 nylon.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-7

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi (82.7
MPa).

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 d eg C).

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi (82.7
MPa).

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 d eg C).

4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self- l
ocking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 7000 psi (48.2
MPa).

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.

4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C).

5. Color: Black.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and applicatio n requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or sta inless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clea
n sub
strates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-8

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features wi
th
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. V
erify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing fi ni sh work.

F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance
of electrical systems and connected items.

G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 300 V: Identification shall completely en
circle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control
, and signal connections.

I. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white leg end on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

J. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate f
or viewing from the floor.

K. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the f
ollowing systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. "EMERGENCY POWER."

2. "POWER."

3. "UPS."
L. Vinyl Wraparound Labels:

1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and acc
essibility.

2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesi
ve appropriate to the location and substrate.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-9

M. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

N. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location wit h high visibility and accessibility.

O. Self-Adhesive Labels:

1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diag
rams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-m
m-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

P. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with hi gh visibility and accessibility.

Q. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

R. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

S. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and acce
ssibility.

1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a m
inimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.

T. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surf ace preparation and paint application.

U. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer ' s written instructions.

V. Underground Line Warning Tape:

1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly ab
ove cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

2. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

3. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in race
ways.

W. Metal Tags:

1. Provide metal tags for all cables in manholes and handholes.

2. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-10

3. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties.

X.

Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags:

1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility.

2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties.

Y. Write-on Tags:

1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility.

2. Secure using UV-stabilized cable ties.

Z. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate
to the location and substrate.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-m m- ) high letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two line s of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches (50 mm) high.

AA. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:

1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate
to the location and substrate.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-m m- ) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

BB. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate
to the location and substrate.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-m m- ) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

CC. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing wi
tho
ut interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-11

B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pu ll points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.

C. Accessible Raceways, 300 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than
30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50- f
oot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

D. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. "EMERGENCY POWER."

2. "POWER."

3. "UPS."
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use vinyl wraparound labels to identify the phase.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50- f
oot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and jun ction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

G. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at termina tions, provide self-adhesive labels with the conductor designation.

H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to con d uctors.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Marker tape that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, termi
nals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

J. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communica
tion, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.

K. Workspace Indication: Apply tape and stencil to finished surfaces. Show working clearan
ces in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush- mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

L. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded
conductors.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-12

M. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:

Sel
f-
adhesive labels.

1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipmen
t, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power-transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.

N. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels.

O. Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels.

P. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

Q. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label.

2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign.

3. Equipment to be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelbo
ard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Panelboards.
e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawi
ngs for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
f. Substations.
g. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
h. Motor-control centers.
i. Enclosed switches.
j. Enclosed circuit breakers.
k. Enclosed controllers.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-13

l. Variable-speed controllers.
m.

Push-button stations.
n. Power-transfer equipment.
o. Contactors.
p. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. q. Power-generating units.
r. Monitoring and control equipment.
s. UPS equipment.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-14

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDIATION, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD
STUDY 26 05 73-1

SECTION 26 05 73
SHO

RT CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENT

A.

The Contractor shall prepare a short circuit and protective device coordination study f
or the electrical power system in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and as shown.

B. The study shall include all portions of the 240 V electrical distribution system f or normal and standby power sources.

C. The work to be provided by the Contractor shall include protection studies for motors
supplied with solid state overload and overcurrent protection devices.

D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain from the serving utili t y and vendors the information required for the work.

E. Provide a complete arc flash hazard study to help protect individuals from electrical
arc flash injuries. These individuals may include any workers who inspect, maintain, or operate energized electrical equipment. Include all equipment 240 panelboards.

F. Provide Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels. These labels are intended to assist operator
s and others in the selection of proper Personal Protective Equipment when working around exposed and energized conductors.

1.2 ORGANIZATION'S QUALIFICATIONS

A.

Short circuit studies, protective device evaluation studies, and protective device coordina
tion studies shall be performed by a third-party testing agency who has been regularly engaged in short circuit and protective device coordination services for a period of at least 15 years. The study shall utilize proven computer programs for making three-phase fault duty calculations. The studies shall be signed by the professional electrical Engineer, registered in the State of California, responsible for the studies.

1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A.

Short Circuit Study in accordance with ANSI standard C37 and IEEE

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDIATION, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD
STUDY 26 05 73-2

standard 141 (Red Book).

B.

Coordination Study in accordance with IEEE 242 "Buff" to determine t he proper overcurrent device settings that will balance system reliability through selective coordination while minimizing the magnitude of an electrical arc flash hazard incident.

C. Incident Energy Study in accordance with the IEEE 1584, "IEEE Guide f or Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations" as referenced in NFPA 70, "Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace", in order to quantify the hazard for selection of personal protective equipment (PPE). Tables that assume fault current levels and clearing time for proper PPE selection are not acceptable.

1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A.

The short circuit protective device coordination report shall conform to the req
uirements of this Section.

B. Studies related to distribution system protection, and coordination shall be

submitted to the Engineer 30 days prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and release of equipment for manufacture.

Approval from the Engineer shall be obtained for a preliminary submittal of sufficient detail to ensure that device selection will be adequate. Preliminary submittal shall indicate the computer program for use in performing the WORK of this Section.

C. Protective device and coordination evaluation studies shall be approved by the Engi
neer prior to releasing all distribution equipment for manufacturer, and project acceptance.

D. The Contractor shall indicate in the submittal changes to the protection scheme or equipment selection that will result in improved system reliability, and safety.

E. The submittal shall provide information concerning the program used for the work of this Section, and it shall include a general discussion of the procedure, items, and data considered in preparing the WORK.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A.

The study organization shall include a single-line, and an impedance diagram of the po
wer system. This diagram shall identify all components considered in the study and the ratings of all power devices. This includes, but is not limited to

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDIATION, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD
STUDY 26 05 73-3

transformers, circuit breakers, relays, fuses, busses, and cables. The resistances, and r
eactance’s of all cables shall be identified in the impedance diagram. The study shall contain, from the serving utility company, all written data regarding maximum available short circuit current, voltage, and X/R ratio of the utilities' power system.

2.2 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Th
e short circuit study shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program an
d shall be in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C 37.010, ANSI/IEEE C

37.13, ANSI/IEEE Standard 242, and ANSI/IEEE Standard 141.

2.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY

A.

A protective device evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy
of circuit breakers, molded case switches, automatic transfer switches, and fuses. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment due to prospective short-circuit currents shall be promptly brought to the Engineer’s attention.

2.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A.

A protective device coordination study shall be performed to provide the necessary
calculations required to select or check the selection of power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics, and settings ratios, and characteristics of associated current transformers, and low-voltage breaker trip characteristics, and settings.

2.5 TIME/CURRENT COORDINATION CURVES

A.

As a minimum, the time/current coordination curves for the power distribut ion system shall include the following on log-log graph paper:

1. Time/current curves for each protective relay, circuit breaker, or fuse showing
graphically that the settings will provide protection and selectivity within industry standards. Each curve shall be identified and tap and time dial settings shall be specified. Provide individual curves for each feeder unless identical to others shown.

2. Time/current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide the maximu
m selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing.

Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the Engineer shall be notified as to the cause. Recommendations shall be included for alternate designs that would improve selectivity.

3. Time/current curves and points for cable and equipment damage.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDIATION, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD
STUDY 26 05 73-4

4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times.

5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph.

6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement.

7. Magnetizing inrush points of transformers.

8. All restrictions of the ANSI and National Electrical Code shall be adhe r ed to and shall be maintained.

9. Thermal limits of motors 250 hp and above.

10. Thermal limits of dry type and liquid insulated transformers. (ANSI damag e curve).

2.6 LABELS

A.

Installed warning labels (orange <40 cal/cm2) or danger label (red > 40 cal/cm
2) in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-2002. The label must be readable in both indoor and outdoor environments for at least 3 years and contain the following information (See sample label, attached):

1. Arc hazard boundary (inches)

2. Working distance (inches)

3. Arc flash incident energy at the working distance (calories/ cm2)

4. PPE category and description including the glove rating

5. Voltage rating of the equipment

6. Limited approach distance (inches)

7. Restricted approach distance (inches)

8. Prohibited approach distance (inches)

9. Equipment/bus name

10. Date prepared

11. Arc flash hazard study preparer name and address

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND ADJUSTMENT

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDIATION, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD
STUDY 26 05 73-5

A.

The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified field Engineer and necessary
tools and equipment to test, calibrate, and adjust the protective relays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the power system coordination study.

B. The motor control center manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified f ield Engineer to calibrate all MCPs as recommended in the power system study.

3.2 STUDY REPORTS

A.

The results of the power system study shall be summarized in a final report . Eight bound copies of the final report shall be submitted. The report shall include the following:

1. Single-line diagram

2. Impedance diagram

3. Tabulation of all protective devices, which shall be identified on the single line
diagram

4. Time/current coordination curves

5. Computerized fault current calculations

6. Specific recommendations if any

7. Test instrumentation, condition, and connections, as applicable, for each study.

3.3 ARC FLASH ANALYSIS

A.

Personnel performing the arc flash analysis shall be trained and experienced in accor
dance with NETA Training Specifications concerning the apparatus and systems being evaluated.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS
TH

SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDIATION, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD
STUDY 26 05 73-6

Chinq
uapin Lift Station Improvements Utility Service Entrance 26 24 13 -1

SECTION 26 24 13

UTI

LITY SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METER PEDESTAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Arrangement with Utility Companies for temporary and permanent electric and service
and telephone.

B. Underground service entrance.

C. Metering equipment.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Basi c Electrical Requirements.

1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

B. SDG&E Service Guide.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System Characteristics: 200A, 120/240 volts, three phase,four-wire, 60 H e rtz.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitabl
e for purpose specified and shown.

1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 UTILITY METERS

Chinq
uapin Lift Station Improvements Utility Service Entrance 26 24 13 -2

A.

Meters will be furnished by SDG&E. Locate meter pedestal such that the pull section acces
s meets the requirements of SDG&E.

2.02 UTILITY METER BASE
A. Description: Meter base shall meet SDG&E electrical service requirements.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tesco
B. Approved equal

2.04 METER PEDESTAL
A. Ratings: NEMA 3RX (316 SST) enclosure, ratings as indicated. Provide main overcurr
ent device as indicated.

B. Cabinet shall be fabricated from 316 stainless steel and shall be all welded con
struction. All fasteners, hinges, latches and hardware shall be of 316 stainless steel and hinges shall be continuous piano style. Enclosure shall be vandal-resistant. There shall be no exposed, nuts, bolts, screws, rivets, or other fasteners on the exterior. Cabinet door shall have 2,000lb. Stress rated stainless steel hasp welded to cabinet and door.

C. Enclosure shall have a powder coat finish in accordance with ASTM B-117.

Color sha
ll be manufacturer’s standard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Make arrangements with Utility Companies to obtain temporary and permanent services t o
the Project. Contractor shall coordinate with SDG&E for meter relocation and establishment of permanent electrical service. The contractor shall be responsible for all Utility fees, charges, and costs required to complete meter relocation and service establishment, including but not limited to application fees, meter set fees, scheduling fees, inspections, reviews, and utility coordination costs.

B. Coordinate location of Utility Company's facilities to ensure proper access is avai
lable.

3.03 INSTALLATION

Chinq
uapin Lift Station Improvements Utility Service Entrance 26 24 13 -3

A.

Install service entrance conduits from Utility Company's indicated point of connecti
on to building service entrance equipment per utility company drawings.

Connect service lateral conductors to service entrance conductors.

B. Provide retaining wall and crash bollards per SDG&E drawings, if required.

END OF SECTION
Chinquapin Lift Station Improvements WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 1

SECTION 262726.00
WIRI

NG DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Material and installation requirements for:
a. Light switches.
b. Receptacles.
c. Device wallplates and coverplates.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 1 - General Requirements.

2. Section 260100.00 – El e ctrical Basic Requirements.

3. Section 260130.00 - Raceways and Boxes.

4. Section 264441.00 - Motor Control Equipment.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:

1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. c. WD 6, Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 20, Standard for Safety General Use Snap Switches.
b. 498, Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. c. 514A, Standard for Safety Metallic Outlet Boxes.
d. 894, Standard for Safety Switches for Use in Hazardous (Classi
fied) Locations.
e. 943, Standard for Safety Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. f. 1010, Standard for Safety Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (
Classified) Locations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:

1. See Section 01340 for requirement for the mechanics and administration of the
submittal process.

Chinquapin Lift Station Improvements WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 2

2. Product technical data:
a.

Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specif
ication.
b. See Division 1 for additional requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are accept
able:

1. Light switches and receptacles:
a. Bryant.
b. Cooper Wiring Devices.
c. Hubbell.
d. Leviton.
e. Pass & Seymour.
f. Crouse-Hinds.
g. Appleton Electric Co.
h. Killark.

B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 1.

2.2 LIGHT SWITCHES
A. General requirements unless modified in specific requirements paragraph of switche
s per designated areas or types:

1. Toggle type, quiet action, Industrial Specification Grade.

2. Self grounding with grounding terminal.

3. Back and side wired.

4. Solid silver cadmium oxide contacts.

5. Rugged urea housing and one-piece switch arm.

6. Rated 20 A, 120/277 Vac.

7. Switch handle color: Ivory.

8. Types as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Single pole.
b. Double pole.
c. 3-way.
d. 4-way.

9. Standards: UL 20, UL 514A, NEMA WD 6.

Chinquapin Lift Station Improvements WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 3

B. All Areas:

1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts.

2. Coverplate:
a. PVC-RGS conduit system:
(1) PVC coated zinc plated malleable iron or copper free aluminum w
ith stainless steel screws utilizing rocker, front
mounted toggle or pull type switch.
(2) Single or multiple gang as required.
b. PVC conduit system:
(1) Gray colored high impact thermoplastic.
(2) Single or multiple gang as required.

2.3 RECEPTACLES
A. General requirements unless modified in specific requirements paragraph of receptacles
per designated areas:

1. Straight blade, Industrial Specification Grade.

2. Brass triple wipe line contacts.

3. One-piece grounding system with double wipe brass grounding contacts and self
grounding strap.

4. Back and side wired.

5. Rated 20 A, 125 Vac.

6. High impact nylon body.

7. Receptacle body color:
a. Normal power: Ivory.

8. Types as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Normal: Self grounding with grounding terminal.
b. Ground fault circuit interrupter: Feed-through type with test and reset
buttons.

9. Duplex or simplex as indicated on the Drawings.

10. Configuration: NEMA 5-20R.

11. Standards: UL 498, UL 514A, UL 943, NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6.

B. All Areas:

1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts.

2. Receptacle body color: Yellow.

3. Coverplate:
a. PVC-RGS conduit system:
(1) PVC coated zinc plated malleable iron or copper free aluminum.
(
2) Single or multiple gang as required.

Chinquapin Lift Station Improvements WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 4

b. PVC conduit system:
(1)
Gray colored high impact thermoplastic.
(2) Single or multiple gang as required.

C. Hazardous Areas:

1. Rated for Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D; and Class I I , Division 1 and 2, Groups F and G.

2. Factory-sealed receptacle/switch/coverplate.
a. Zinc plated malleable iron or copper free aluminum with stainless steel
screws and gasketed spring-loaded cover.

3. "Dead-front" construction requiring plug to be inserted and rotated to activate
receptacle.
a. Ordinary non-hazardous plug shall not activate the receptacle.

4. Standard: UL 1010.

D. Special Purpose Receptacles:

1. NEMA configuration as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Coverplate: See requirements per area designations herein.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS WIRING DEVICES
A. Manual Motor Starters: Horsepower rated with or without thermal overloads, see Sectio
n 264442.00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mount devices where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled in Section 2601

00.00. C. See Section 260130.00 for device outlet box requirements.

D. Where more than one (1) receptacle is installed in a room, they shall be sym
metrically arranged.

E. Provide blank plates for empty outlets.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 1

SECTION 26 32 13

DIE

SEL ENGINE DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Engine-generator assembly.

2. Diesel engine.

3. Diesel fuel-oil system.

4. Control and monitoring.

5. Generator overcurrent and fault protection.

6. Alternator, exciter, and voltage regulator.

7. Vibration isolation devices.

8. Finishes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 26 36 00 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and r
elays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine generators.

C. The City has pre-purchased the generator, The generator will be assigned to the contractor for storage, installation, and termination of conductors and conduits. The contractor will be responsible for coordination and field testing. Parts 1 and 2 herein is for contractor information only.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.

ECM: Engine control module.

B. EPS: Emergency power supply.

C. EPSS: Emergency power supply system.

D. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parame
ter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.

2. Include thermal damage curve for generator.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 2

3. Include time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

4. Include fuel consumption in gallons per hour (liters per hour) at 0.8 power factor at 50
, 75, and 100 percent of generator capacity.

5. Include generator efficiency at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 times gene
rator capacity.

6. Include airflow requirements for cooling and combustion air in cubic feet per minut
e (cubic meters per minute) at 0.8 power factor at 104 deg F (40 deg C) cooling system rating. Provide radiator air flow restriction data for ambient rating.

7. Include generator characteristics, including, but not limited to, kilowatt rating, eff
iciency, reactances, and short-circuit current capability.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans and elevations for engine generator and other components specifi
ed. Indicate access requirements affected by height of subbase fuel tank.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, requir
ed clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Identify fluid drain ports.

4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail including anchorages and attachments to struct
ure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiri
ng, and interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for engine generators and functional relationship between all electrical components.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency.

B. from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: With engine and generator mounted
on rails, identify center of gravity and total weight, including, silencer, subbase-mounted fuel tank,] and each piece of equipment not integral to the engine generator, and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based an
d their installation requirements.

C. Source Quality-Control Reports: Including, but not limited to, the foll owing:

1. Certified Summary of prototype-unit test report.

2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not i
dentical, to those tested on prototype unit.

3. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

4. Report of sound generation.

5. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 3

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergenc
y, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for
ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
b. Training plan.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protecti
ve covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.

2. Replaceable Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than t
wo of each.

3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

4. Tools: Each tool listed by part number in operations and maintenance manual.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. ISO 9001 certified for design, development, production and service complete product li
ne.

2. Produced this type of equipment for a period of at least 10 years.

3. Actively maintaining a 24-hour parts and service organization regularly engaged in m ai
ntenance contract programs to perform preventive maintenance and service on equipment similar to that specified.

4. Furnish a service agreement that includes system operation under simulated operating
conditions; adjustment to the generator set, transfer switch, and switchgear controls as required, and certification in the owner's maintenance log of repairs made and functional tests performed on all systems.

5. Engine-driven generator assembly furnished by a single manufacturer, responsi
ble for design, coordination, and testing of the complete system.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 4

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged
engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: five years from date of registered startup or commissioning. 2 . The generator set to include a standard warranty covering one (1) years or 2 000 hours Standby, whichever occurs first (hours or years), to warrant against defective material and workmanship in accordance with the manufacturer's published warranty from the date of initial startup.

3. Extended limited warranties that can be obtained include: Stationary Standby tw o (2) year or 2000 hour, Stationary Standby five (5) year or 3000 hours, Stationary Standby five (5) year or 3000 hours comprehensive.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provi de Rehlko
Power Systems; KDI Series 20REOZK engine generator. NO EQUALS ALLOWED.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generators and auxiliary components from single sour
ce from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Engine generator housing, subbase fuel tank, engine generator, bat
teries, battery racks, silencers, sound attenuating equipment, accessories, and components to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of an
y parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Shake-table testing to comply with ICC-ES AC156. Testing to be performed with all fluids at worst-case normal levels. Water to be substituted for diesel fuel in fuel tank during test.

3. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

B. B11 Compliance: Comply with B11.19.

C. NFPA Compliance:

1. Comply with NFPA 30.

2. Comply with NFPA 37.

3. Comply with NFPA 70.

4. Comply with NFPA 99.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 2200 "Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies. "

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 5

E. CSA Compliance: Comply with CSA.

F. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with EPA requirements and applicable state and local
government requirements.

G. Noise Emission:

1. Maximum exhaust isolated sound pressure emitted by engine generator 81 dBA at a di
stance of 23 ft. (7 m) while operating at 100 percent load and including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.

H. Environmental Conditions: Engine generator system to withstand the following en
vironmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 deg F (Minus 15 deg C) to 59 deg F (15 deg C).

2. Altitude: Sea level.

2.3 ENGINE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, liquid-cooled engine, with brushless generator and accessories
.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

C. Power Rating: Standby.

D. Nameplate Rating: 20 kW.

E. Power Factor: 0.8, lagging.

F. Frequency: 60 Hz.

G. Voltage: 240-V ac.

H. Phase: Three-phase, four-wire.

I. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

J. Mounting Frame: Structural steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components w
ithout depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving.

K. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated at 0.8 power factor excluding power r
equired for the continued and repeated operation of the unit and auxiliaries , with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 6

2. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address,
and model and serial number of component.

L. Engine Generator Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated output v oltage from no load to full load.

2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent
step-load increase or decrease and meets ISO8528-5, Class G2 for standard loads. Voltage to recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within six seconds.

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.25 percent of rated frequency fr
om no load to full load.

4. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step-l
oad increase or decrease and meets ISO8528-5, Class G2 for standard loads. Frequency to recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

5. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral may not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics.

Telephone influence factor, determined in accordance with NEMA MG 1, may not exceed 50.

6. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at syste m
output terminals, system to supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.

7. Start Time:
a. Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10 system requirements.

M. Engine Generator Performance for Sensitive Loads:

1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine i s permissible to meet specified performance.
a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contr
act Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.
b. Generator shall have a maximum starting frequency dip or 10% and maximu
m voltage dip of 25% with the following stepped loads:

Step 1: 3 kva miscellaneous linear load
Step 2: 10 hp submersible pump (unloaded) soft starter (300% current limit Step 3: 10 hp submersible pump (unloaded) soft starter (300% current limit

2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated output voltag e from no load to full load.

3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 15 percent variation for 50 percent
step-load increase or decrease and meets ISO8528-5, Class G3 for

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 7

sensitive loads. Voltage to recover and remain within the steady-state operating band
within four seconds.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated
frequency from no load to full load.

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 7 percent variation for 50 percent step-l
oad increase or decrease and meets ISO8528-5, Class G3 for sensitive loads. Frequency to recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line and line to neutr
al may not exceed 5 percent total or 3 percent for a single harmonic.

Telephone influence factor, determined in accordance with NEMA MG 1, may not exceed 50.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at syst e m output terminals, system to supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components.

8. Excitation System: Performance to be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonli
near load.

9. Start Time:
a. Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10 system requirements.

2.4 DIESEL ENGINE
A. Fuel: ASTM D975, diesel fuel oil, Grade 2-D S15.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Minimum Standby Load Factor Rating: 90 percent.

D. Lubrication System: Engine or skid-mounted.

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to particles that may damage engine per manufact
urer's written instructions while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperatu
re. Unit to be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Closed Crankcase Ventilation: System: Prevents crankcase oil vapor from draining
or escaping the engine.

4. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable con
tainer with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Jacket Coolant Heater: Electric-tank type, factory installed in coolant jacket sys tem.

Comply with UL 499.

F. Integral Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water
, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 8

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant to 110 percen
t of capacity.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maxim
um closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant
flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer
covering of aging-, UV-, and abrasion-resistant material. a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 215 deg
F (102 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum.

G. Muffler/Silencer:

1. Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust
piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.
a. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.

H. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replacea bl e dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

I. Starting System: 12-V dc electric, with negative ground.

1. Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds.

2. Battery Heater: Thermostatically controlled heater to be arranged to maintain batte
ry above 50 deg F (10 deg C) regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. Provide ventilation to exhaust battery gases.

3. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltag e r
egulation and continuous rating per manufacturer's standard.

J. Battery Charger:

1. Source Limitations: Obtain battery charger from engine-driven generator manufact
urer.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1236 for Category BBHH.

3. CE Certified.

4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 110.

5. Environmental Conditions: Battery charger to withstand the following environ
mental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:
a. Ambient Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 d
eg C) with full charger output available up to 122 deg F (50 deg C). b. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 9

c. Altitude: Meets full performance requirements from sea level to 5000 ft. (1600
m). Chargers installed at higher altitudes may automatically derate output power to prevent overheating of internal components but remain operable.

6. Charger Operation: Current-limited, constant-voltage, automatic-boost-type charge
r designed for lead-acid batteries, with the following features:
a. Automatic three-stage charge cycle for up to three independent batteries simult
aneously per charger.
b. Output Voltage Regulation: Charger regulates output to within plus or minu
s 0.5 percent of manufacturer-provided voltage settings despite variations of input voltage, input frequency, and output current. c. Battery Thermal Compensation: Battery temperature compensation with adjustable
slope, factory set at minus 0.18 percent per degree C, and equipped for sensing battery temperature.
d. AC Input: Charger operates from any 45- to 65-Hz ac source with volt age ranging from 105- to 264-V rms.

7. LCD Digital Display: AC input voltmeter, DC output voltmeter, and ammeter (1
percent accuracy).

8. LED Lamp Indicators: Current limit, AC ON, and charger fail.

9. Charger Fail Alarm Contact: Voltage-free (dry type) form "C" output. 1 0. Filtered output for type VRLA AGM batteries.

11. Charger Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 (IP20), wall mounted and rated for ge
nerator duty with charger enclosure vibration resistance.

2.5 DIESEL FUEL-OIL SYSTEM
A. Piping: Fuel-oil piping to be Schedule 40 black steel, complying with requir ements in Section 231113 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping." Cast iron, aluminum, copper, and galvanized steel may not be used in the fuel-oil system.

B. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine to provide primary fuel flow under starting an d
load conditions.

C. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 1 micron.

D. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel
to source.

E. Subbase-Mounted, Double-Wall, Fuel-Oil Tank: Complying with UL 142 and i ncl uding the following features:

1. Steel Channel Support System: Reinforced steel box channel for generator support
. Full height gussets at either end of channel and at generator mounting locations.

2. Fuel Level Gauge: Direct-reading, UL-listed, magnetic fuel level gauge wi th a hermetically sealed, vacuum-tested dial.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 10

3. Low-Fuel Alarm Contact: Float-type switch for remote or local annunciation of a low-
fuel-level condition.

4. Fill Tube: 2-inch (25-mm) NPT opening with lockable cap.

5. Leak detection in interstitial space.

6. Vandal-resistant fill cap.

7. Fill-pipe spill containment, minimum capacity 5 gal. (19 L).

8. Emergency inner- and outer-tank UL-listed relief vents sized in accordance with American
Petroleum Institute Standard No 2000 with an opening pressure of

0.5 psig (3.5 kPa) and full opening pressure of 2.5 psig (17 kPa).

9. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdi
ction.

10. Fuel tank capacity shall be less 53 gal lons maximum with fuel capacity label.

2.6 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control
and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of engine generator. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, engine generator starts. The off position of the same switch initiates generator-set shutdown.

When the engine generator is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and initiate alarms.

B. Comply with UL 508A.

C. Configuration:

1. Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine
gauges will be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the engine generator. The mounting method will isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. Panel will be powered from the engine generator battery.

D. Control and Monitoring Panel:

1. Digital engine generator controller with integrated alphanumeric display, providing
two lines of data. The display has back lighting for ease of operator use in high- and low-light conditions. Capable of local and remote control, monitoring, and programming.

2. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 158 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 70 deg C).

3. Maximum Operating Humidity: 95 percent noncondensing.

4. Corrosion Resistant: Tested in accordance with ASTM B117 (salt spray test).

5. Controller Features:
a. Mode Selector: Allowing selection of one of the following modes:
1) Off/Reset: Prohibits the generator from starting and resets shutdow
ns. In this mode, the controller does not respond to remote start and stop commands.
2) Manual: Allows user to locally start and stop to operate the generator.

In this
mode, the controller does not respond to remote start and stop commands.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 11

3) Auto: Allows generator to start and stop based on remote commands.

In t
his mode, the generator does not respond to manual start and stop commands.
b. Emergency Stop Switch: Latch-type remote stop switch, red in color with mushr
oom-type head. Depressing the stop button will immediately stop the generator set and lock out any automatic remote starting. c. Audible Alarm: Horn sounds for specific warning and shutdown conditions. d. Alarm Silence/Lamp Test Pushbutton: Silences audible alarm when depressed. A
ll controller-indicating lights are simultaneously illuminated while actuated.
e. Fault Light: LED indicating abnormal conditions:
1) Yellow: Active warning condition or mode selector switch not in automat
ic.
2) Red: Active shutdown condition.
f. Engine Control Features:
1) Programmable engine start delay.
2) Programmable engine cool-down delay.
3) Programmable warm-up delay based on time or engine temperature. 4) Programmable idle speed.
5) Programmable cyclic cranking with adjustable on time, off time, and number
of cycles.
g. Event Logging:
1) Maintain record of a minimum of 1,000 events with date and time locall
y for warning and shutdown faults.

6. Monitoring Instruments: Accessible through the digital engine generator controller and viewab
le during operation.
a. Engine-coolant temperature.
b. Battery voltage.
c. Running-time meter.
d. Engine speed.
e. Oil pressure.
f. Fuel level (with optional sensor)
g. Fuel pressure.
h. AC output voltage for each phase, 0.5 percent accuracy. i. AC output current for each phase, 0.5 percent accuracy. j. AC frequency meter, 0.5 percent accuracy.
k. kW total and per phase, 1.0 percent accuracy.
l. kVARS total and per phase, 1.0 percent accuracy.
m. kVA total and per phase, 1.0 percent accuracy.
n. kW hours.

7. Service Data: Stored in the controller and available for display. a. Generator model number and serial number.
b. Controller serial number and firmware version.

8. Operational Records: Stored in controller beginning at system startup. a. Total run-time hours.
b. Total loaded hours.
c. Total kW hours.
d. Controller run-time hours.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 12

e. Number of starts.

9. Controls and Protective Devices: Controls, shutdown devices, and common visual
alarm indication, including the following:
a. Mode selector switch not in automatic position.
b. Overcrank shutdown.
c. Low lubricating-oil pressure warning.
d. Low lubricating-oil pressure shutdown.
e. Low coolant temperature warning.
f. High engine temperature warning.
g. High engine temperature shutdown.
h. Overspeed shutdown.
i. Low fuel pressure shutdown.
j. Low fuel main tank.
1) Critically low-fuel-level warning.
k. Coolant low-level shutdown device.
l. Coolant high-temperature warning.
m. Coolant high-temperature shutdown.
n. ECM Digital Trouble Codes warnings.
o. ECM Digital Trouble Codes shutdown.
p. Loss of ECM Communications shutdown.
q. ECM mismatch shutdown.
r. Battery high-voltage warning.
s. Battery-charger malfunction warning.
t. Battery low-voltage warning.
u. Remote manual stop shutdown.
v. Local manual stop shutdown.
w. Alternator protection shutdown.
x. Overcurrent warning.
y. Overcurrent shutdown.
z. Under frequency warning.
aa. Under frequency shutdown.
bb. Over frequency warning.
cc. Over frequency shutdown.
dd. Over power warning.
ee. Over power shutdown.
ff. Under voltage warning.
gg. Under voltage shutdown.
hh. Over voltage warning.
ii. Over voltage shutdown.
jj. User-defined input warning.
kk. User-defined input shutdown.
ll. No oil pressure signal shutdown.
mm. No speed sensor signal shutdown.
nn. Fail-to-start shutdown.

E. Connection to Datalink:

1. Provide connections for datalink transmission of indications to remote data termi
nals via Ethernet IP.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 13

F. Supporting Items: Sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices located on en
gine or generator unless otherwise indicated.

G. Start Signal Wiring Integrity Monitor: UL-listed modular system to monitor condition of gener
ator remote start circuit(s), annunciate faults, and start generator in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 700.10(D)(4).

1. Output Contacts: Two form "C" contacts, one for engine start and one for start circuit alarm.

2.7 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Overcurrent protective devices to be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a shor
t circuit occurs.

1. Overcurrent protective devices for the entire EPSS to be coordinated to optimize selective
tripping when a short circuit occurs. Coordination of protective devices considers both utility and EPSS as the voltage source.

2. Overcurrent protective devices for the EPSS to be accessible only to authorized personne
l.

B. Generator Overcurrent Protective Device:

1. Load Bank Molded-case circuit breaker, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated;
complying with UL 489:
a. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. b. Trip Rating: Matched to generator output rating.
c. Mounting: Adjacent to, or integrated with, control and monitoring panel.

2. Main Molded-case circuit breaker, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying
with UL 489:
a. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneo
us.
b. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.

3. Under three-phase fault conditions, generator to supply 300 percent of rated full- l
oad current for up to 10 seconds.

2.8 ALTERNATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Maximum Temperature Rise: 80 deg C at full load over 40C ambient.

C. Drive: Alternator shaft to be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter to be rotated i
ntegrally with alternator rotor.

D. Electrical Insulation: Class H.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 14

E. Construction to prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspe
ed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation.

F. Enclosure: Dripproof.

G.

Voltage Regulator: Microprocessor-based, high-speed digital voltage regulator, separate
from exciter, with three-phase, true RMS sensing, providing performance as specified.

1. Maintain steady-state voltage within 0.50 percent from no load to full load.

2. Adjusting Feature on Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide plus or minus 10 pe
rcent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

H. Alternator Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain st ator windings above dew point.

I. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

J. R
egulatory Requirements:

1. Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laborat
ory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Elastomeric Vibration Isolators: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer neoprene or n atu ral rubber, molded with a nonslip pattern and baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. Compliant with ISO 8528-9.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 23 21 16 "Hydronic Piping Specialties" f or vibration isolation and flexible connector materials for steel piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts" for vibration isolation and flexible connector materials for exhaust shroud and ductwork.

D. Vibration isolation devices may not be used to accommodate misalignments or to make bends.

2.10 FINISHES
A. Indoor Enclosures and Components: Heavy-duty, high-durability, fade-, scratch- a n d corrosion-resistant finish achieved through a multi-stage finishing process from the genset manufacturer including:

1. Pre-cleaning: Enclosure components cleaned with a two-stage alkaline cleaning process to r
emove grease, grit, and grime from parts then subjected to a Zirconium-based conversion coating process to prepare the metal for electrocoat (e-coat) adhesion.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 15

2. Primer: All enclosure parts to receive 100 percent epoxy primer electrocoat (e- coat)
with high-edge protection.

3. Finish Coating: Powder-baked paint for superior finish, durability, and appearance.

4. Minimum Enclosure Corrosion Resistance: 3000 hours salt spray test in accordance
with ASTM B117.

5. Powder coat for fading and abrasion resistance.

B. Subbase Tank: Polyurea-texturized rubber coating for corrosion protection and adequat
e surface grip from the genset manufacturer.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine generator using same engine model, constru
cted of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with IEEE 115.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locati
ons of connections before packaged engine generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facili t ies occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service in accordance with requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than 14 , unless otherwise approved, working days
in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager
's written permission.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 404.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 16

B. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written installation and align
ment instructions.

C. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install engine generators on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with
requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for engine generators. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

D. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories,
for periodic maintenance.

E. Exhaust System: Install 316 stainless steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping sized in accordance with allowable back pressure for the engine and indicated on mechanical plans.

1. Piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic
Piping."

2. Install flexible connectors and steel piping materials in accordance with requir
ements in Section 23 21 16 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

3. Insulate muffler/silencer and exhaust system components in accordance with requir
ements in Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

4. Install isolating thimbles where exhaust piping penetrates combustible surfaces with a
minimum of 9 inches (225 mm) of clearance from combustibles.

F. Drain Piping: Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full si ze of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless steel flexible connector, and 316 stainless steel piping.

1. Piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic
Piping."

2. Drain piping valves, connectors, and installation requirements are specified in Section
23 21 16 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."
G. Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements. are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engi ne generator to allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 17

D. Ground equipment in accordance with NFPA 70.

E. Connect wiring in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide flexible conduit routed to the engine
generator from a stationary element.

F. Balance single-phase loads to obtain a maximum of 10 percent unbalance between any t
wo phases.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components in accordance with Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment" and Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Install a sign indicating the generator neutral is installed as a separately derived source per
NFPA 70.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency:

1. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service represe
ntative.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each visual and mechanical inspection
and electrical and mechanical test listed in first two subparagraphs below, as specified in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1) Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and the Specif
ications.
2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
4) Verify that the unit is clean.
b. Electrical and Mechanical Tests:
1) Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation as requir
ed by the application.
2) Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, overte
mperature, overspeed, and other protection features as
applicable.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are addit
ional to those specified here, including, but not limited to, single-step full- load pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells in accordance with manufact
urer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS 26 32 13 - 18

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery term
inals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a cap
acity load test for the battery.
c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge
.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrit
y of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure
voltage and frequency transients for 50 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

D. Test instruments to have been calibrated within the past 12 months, traceable to NIS T Calibration Services, and adequate for making positive observation of test results.

Make calibration records available for examination on request.

E. Leak Test: After installation, inspect exhaust, coolant, and fuel systems and t es t for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit s to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment.

G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning control s and equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and as specified above.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations, and retest until spe
cified requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings an d measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.

Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personne
l to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.

END OF SECTION 26 32 13

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 1

SECTION 26 36 00

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1
- GENERAL

1.1 S
UMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Transfer switch controller.

2. Transfer switch accessories.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS): Device in which a controller manages the en t ire process, and initiation begins when the controller senses a loss of the primary source.

The controller monitors the source voltage and sends a command to the generators to run when the voltage falls below a preset limit for a prescribed period. The controller also monitors the secondary source voltage and frequency, and when these values are within acceptable limits, the switch transfers the load from the primary to the secondary source. When the primary source is reestablished for a prescribed period to ensure stability, the switch may automatically transfer the load back to the primary source.

Most critical and life-safety loads require automatic operation as defined by the NEC.

B. Contactor type switching mechanism: Contactors are constructed as an electrically control
led, double-throw switch where a solenoid mechanism opens one set of power contacts while closing a second set.

C. Enclosures: The following are UL 50 definitions of enclosure types listed in order of protecti
on

1. Type 4X: Same as Type 4 except constructed from corrosion-resistant material.

As def
ined by industry standards, corrosion resistant means constructed to provide a degree of protection against exposure to corrosive agents such as salt spray. Stainless steel is the strongest of the corrosion-resistant materials. It exhibits many of the same resistances attributed to fiberglass materials as well as resistance to highly polar solvents such as acetone and MEK. Type 316 grade stainless steel is an option that provides improved resistance to salt, some acids, and high temperature. Type 316 grade is a strongly recommended choice for marine environments that are within five miles of salt water or otherwise subject to exposure to salt spray. Note that Type 316 grade resistance to sulfates and chorine is less than that provided by Type 304 grade
D. Transition Types:

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 2

1. Standard (Open) Transition: Break-before-make transfer. In open transition, the load
is disconnected from one normal source before being connected to the alternate emergency source.

E. Withstand and Close-On Rating (WCR): The following are the types of transfer switch WCR r
atings.

1. Specific Breaker Rating: Transfer switch that is tested in coordination with speci
fic upstream circuit breakers. Only breakers listed on the transfer switch rating decal may be used.

2. Short-Time Rating: The short-time ratings require longer-duration application of fault current and are intended for selective coordination purposes, where an extended delay is needed to allow for downstream protective devices to clear a fault closer to its source.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components an
d profiles, and finishes for transfer switches.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details showing minimum clearances, conductor
entry provisions, gutter space, and installed features and devices.

2. Include material lists for each switch specified.

3. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sour ces,
and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and/or bypass/isolation switch.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer-authorized service representative.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for transfer switches, accessories, and component
s, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and loca
te and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based an
d their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 3

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operati
on, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. b. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration i
nstructions, including software, where applicable.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. ISO 9001 certified for design, development, production, and service of complete product li
ne.

2. Produced this type of equipment for a period of at least 10 years.

3. Actively maintaining a 24-hour parts and service organization regularly engaged in mai
ntenance contract programs to perform preventive maintenance and service on equipment like that specified.

4. Furnish a service agreement that includes system operation under simulated operating
conditions; adjustment to the generator set, transfer switch, and switchgear controls as required, and certification in the Owner's maintenance log of repairs made and functional tests performed on all systems.

5. Transfer switch, engine-driven generator assembly, and paralleling switchgear (if appli
cable) must be furnished by a single manufacturer, responsible for design, coordination, and testing of the complete system.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Member company of NETA.
a. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transfer switch or transfer switch components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: five years from date of registered startup or commissioning. 2 . Transfer switch and accessories to include a standard one-year warranty against defective
material and workmanship in accordance with manufacturer's published warranty from registered startup date.

3. Extended Warranty: Comprehensive five-year warranty including repair parts and labor
in accordance with manufacturer's published warranty.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Rehlko Pow
er Systems (NO EQUALS).

B. Source Limitations: Manufacturer must supply generators, transfer switches, an d paralleling switchgear for single-source warranty, parts, and service through a factory authorized representative with factory-trained technicians.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 99.

F. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

G. Comply with International Building Code (IBC) Seismic Certification.

H. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.

2. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Contactor- style au
tomatic transfer-switch units, rated 800 A and higher, to have separate arcing contacts.

3. Inspection of all contacts possible from the front of the switch without disassembl
y of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches rated 800 A and higher must have front removable and replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts replaceable without removing power conductors or bus bars.

4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

5. Lug Material: Tin-plated aluminum.

6. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

7. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

8. Connectors to be marked for conductor size and type in accordance with UL 1
008.

I. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system
transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Short-Circuit Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing in accordance with UL 1008.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 5

K. Repetitive Accuracy of Solid-State Controls: All settings to be plus or minus 0.5 percent or bet
ter over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

L. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components meet or exceed voltage- surge wi
thstand capability requirements when tested in accordance with IEEE C62.62.

Components meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

M. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid o r electric-motor-operated mechanism. Switches for emergency or standby purposes to be mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions to prevent simultaneous connection to both power sources unless closed transition or manual transfer.

N. Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units to be t he nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed.

O. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawi
ngs, by color code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable markers at terminations.

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wir ing indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bo
ttom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

2.2 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROLLER
A. Requires Automatic transfer switch controller.

B. Supervised Transfer Switch: Provide a door-mounted, three-position, selector sw i tch
with Auto, Manual, and Transfer positions.

1. With the controller set to automatic mode and selector switch in Auto position, the
user transfer switch operates normally.

2. With the controller set to automatic mode and selector switch in Manual position, the use
r is required to toggle the selector switch to initiate a transfer from emergency to normal position.

3. With the controller set to non-automatic mode and selector switch in Manual positi
on, the user is required to toggle the selector switch to the transfer position to initiate a transfer in either direction. In this mode, the ATS must not automatically transfer to an acceptable source in the case of source failure.

C. Display: Integral to controller for viewing all available data and setting desi r ed operational parameters. Operational parameters also available for viewing and control through communications interface port or USB. The following parameters are only adjustable via password-protected programming on the controller:
a. Nominal line voltage and frequency.
b. Single- or three-phase sensing.
c. Operating parameter protection.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 6

D. Controller capable of sensing phase rotation of both normal and emergency sources.

Sour
ce is considered unacceptable if phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or BAC). Unacceptable phase rotation indicated on LCD; service required LED and annunciation through the communication protocol and dry contacts.

Phase rotation sensing capable of being disabled, if required.

E. Controller capable of detecting a single phasing condition of a source, even though a voltag
e may be regenerated by the load. This condition is a loss of phase and considered a failed source.

F. Source status screens provided for both normal and emergency sources to provide digital
readout of voltage on all three phases (phase to phase and phase to neutral), frequency, and phase rotation.

G. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.

H. Switch-Position Indicating Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

I. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- an d emer
gency-source sensing circuits.

1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Avai
lable."

2. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Avai
lable."
J. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for
each switch position, rated 2 A at 30 V(dc)/ 250VAC .

K. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so that transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

L. Controller operates through a period of loss of control power.

M. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal and Alternate Source: Sense low phase-t
o-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage to be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage to be adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 90 percent.

N. Overvoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal and Alternate Source: Sense low phase-t
o-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage to be adjustable from 95 to 100 percent of dropout, and dropout voltage to be adjustable from 106 to 135 percent of nominal value. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent and dropout at 110 (600V) or 115 percent.

O. Voltage Unbalance Sensing for Each Phase of Normal and Alternate Source: Sen se

low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage to be adjustable from 3 to 18 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage to be adjustable from 5 to 20 percent of nominal value. Factory set for pickup at 10 percent and dropout at 20 percent.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 7

P. Under-frequency: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup frequency to be adjustabl
e from 80 to 95 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent.

Dropout frequency to be adjustable from 95 to 99 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 99 percent of dropout.

Q. Over-frequency: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup frequency to be adjustabl
e from 105 to 120 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 110 percent.

Dropout frequency to be adjustable from 101 to 115 percent of nominal. Factory set for dropout at 101 percent.

R. Time Delays:

1. Momentary Genset Start Delay: Adjustable time delay of zero to 15 seconds to ove
rride momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capable of extended time delay up to 60 minutes by providing an external 12 or 24 V(dc) power supply.

2. Transfer to Emergency Source: Adjustable from zero to 60 minutes provided on trans
fer to the emergency source for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency. Factory setting is three seconds.

3. Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from zero to 60 minutes time delay for re-transfer to normal. Time delay automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. Factory setting is 15 minutes.

4. Engine Cool Down: Adjustable from zero to 60 minutes provided on shutdown of engine
generator for cool down. Factory setting is five seconds.

S. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and norm
ally open; rated 10 A at 32 V(dc) minimum.

T. Engine Shutdown Contacts:

1. Time Delay: Adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes.

Contact initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

U. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Up to 21 different exercise events can be set with different settings of various parameters. Maximum exercise run time is 24 hours. Exerciser features include the following:

1. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.

V. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is unavailab le.

W. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annu
nciator and control panel TCP/IP.

X. Ethernet Board: RJ-45 connection for communication capability with Modbus TC P/IP protocol.

Y. Controller Logic Disconnect Switch: Two-position switch, mounted inside the enclosure to disconnect three-phase voltage sensing and power to controller without

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 8

disconnecting the load for use during maintenance and service. The switch has two posit
ions, auto and disconnect. User must manually disable generator prior to placing the controller logic disconnect in OFF position.

2.3 CONTACTOR-TYPE, TRANSFER SWITCH
A.

Withstand Rating Type: 50,000 amperers.

1. Short-time withstand capability for 30 cycles.

B. Voltage and Frequency Rating: 240 V(ac), 60 Hz .

C.

Configuration Type: 3-pole, 4-wire, solid neutral.

D. Enclosure Type: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 4X, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 50
8, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Ampere Rating: 150 A.

F. Cable connections accessible via front access.

2.4 TRANSFER SWITCH ACCESSORIES
A. Input/Output Module: Two programmable inputs and six programmable outputs. 1 . Inputs:
a. Contact closure.
b. Current: 5 mA maximum.
c. Connection Type: Terminal strip.
d. Wire Size: 14 to 24 AWG.
e. Maximum Distance: 700 ft. (213 m).

2. Outputs:
a. Contact Type: Form C (SPDT).
b. Contact Rating: 2 A at 30 V(dc) or 500 mA at 125 V(ac). c. Connection Type: Terminal strip.
d. Wire Size: 14 to 24 AWG.

B. High Current/Voltage I/O Module: Two programmable inputs and three programm ab le
outputs.

1. Inputs:
a. Contact closure.
b. Current: 5 mA maximum.
c. Connection Type: Terminal strip.
d. Wire Size: 14 to 24 AWG.
e. Maximum Distance: 700 ft. (213 m).

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 9

2. Outputs:
a. Contact Type: Form C (SPDT).
b.

Contact Rating: 12 A at 24 V(dc), 12 A at 250 V(ac), 10 A at 2 77 V(ac), or 2 A at 480 V(ac).
c. Connection Type: Terminal strip.
d. Wire Size: 14-24 AWG.

C. Current Sensing: Measurement and display of load current on all phases with 1 percent accuracy.

D. Digital Meter: Measurement and display of voltage, current, frequency, and pow er for both sources, including programmable visual alarms for high and low voltage and high current. A serial, RS-485 port and two auxiliary contacts for external connections and password protected programming menus.

E. Engine Start Circuit Monitoring Module: Continuously monitoring for wiring fault s (open
or short circuits) as required by the electrical code NEC 700.10.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. For each test required by UL 1008, provide test confirmation from manufacturer for the following conditions:
a. General - Normal operation.
b. Overvoltage.
c. Undervoltage.
d. Loss of supply voltage.
e. Reduction of supply voltage.
f. Alternative supply voltage or frequency is at minimum acceptable values. g. Temperature rise.
h. Dielectric voltage-withstand; before and after short-circuit test. i. Overload.
j. Endurance.
k. Short circuit Withstand.
l. Short circuit Close-On.
m. Insulating base and supports damage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 I

NSTALLATION
A. Identify components in accordance with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for El ect rical Systems."
B. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 10

3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to gener
ator sets, control, and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways except within electrical enclosures. Conceal raceway and
cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Racew
ays and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no exce
ss and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

D. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for E
lectrical Systems."
E. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electri cal Power Conductors and Cables."
F. Connect twisted pair cable in accordance with Section 26 05 23 "Control- V oltage Electrical Power Cables."
G. Route and brace conductors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Sectio
n 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."] Do not obscure manufacturer's markings and labels.

H. Final connections to equipment to be made with liquid tight, flexible metallic condu it no more than 18 inches (457 mm) in length.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Administrant for Tests and Inspections:

1. Administer and perform tests and inspections with assistance of factory- author
ized service representative.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment, test for compliance with requirements in accordance wit
h NETA ATS.

2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean.
e. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving
and sliding surfaces.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 11

f. Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible. g. Verify tightness of all control connections.
h.

Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the follow
ing methods, or both:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated
torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's
published data.
i. Perform manual transfer operation.
j. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate sources.

k. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters. l. Inspect control power transformers.
1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tight
ness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.
2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit-breaker ratings match D
rawings.
3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting contacts, grounding
contacts, and interlocks.

3. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
b.

Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. Compare measured values with manufact
urer's acceptable values.
c. Verify settings and operation of control devices.
d. Calibrate and set all relays and timers.
e. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation. f. Perform automatic transfer tests.
g. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions:
1) Normal source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays. 2) Engine start sequence.
3) Time delay on transfer.
4) Alternative source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays. 5) Automatic transfer operation.
6) Interlocks and limit switch function.
7) Time delay and retransfer on normal power restoration. 8) Engine cool-down and shutdown feature.

4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulatio
n-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits.

Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 00 - 12

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integri
ty of barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d.

Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, perform each electrical test for transfer swi tches stated in NETA ATS and demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to ATS and retransfer from emergency
source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings
.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer- switch opera
tions.
f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, trans
fer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay setting s and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personne
l to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment.

B. Training includes testing ground-fault protective devices and instructions to determine when t
he ground-fault system will be retested. Include instructions on where ground- fault sensors are located and how to avoid negating the ground-fault protection scheme during testing and circuit modifications.

C. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 1

SEC
TION 26 44 40

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This section includes the requirements for 600V-class low voltage motor control centers (MCCs) for use on alternating current power systems.

B. The City has pre-purchased the MCC. The MCC will be assigned to the contractor for storage, installation, and termination of conductors and conduits. The contractor will be responsible for coordination and field testing. Parts 1 and 2 herein is for contractor information only.

C. The MCC equipment shall be Allen Bradley Centerline, No substitutions.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The MCC shall meet or exceed the requirements within the following standards for MCCs.

1. NEMA ICS 18 - Industrial Control and Systems: Motor Control Centers

2. UL 845 - UL Standard for Safety for Motor Control
Centers NOTE: UL 845 is a harmonized standard
consisting of:
a) Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) UL 845
b) Canadian Standards Association (CSA) C22.2 No. 254-05 c) Association of Standardization and Certification (ANCE) NMX-J-353- ANCE- 2006

3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

B. The MCC shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in facilities registered to ISO 9001.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Factory assembled, factory wired and factory tested motor control centers:

1. Motor Control Centers and major components to be products of a single manufacturer including, but not limited:
a. Starters.
b. Intrinsic barriers and seal fail relays indicated on the Drawings. c. Related equipment specified or indicated on the Drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Division 1.

B. Manufacturer Drawings.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 2

1. MCC elevations showing dimensional information including details such as, but not limited to, the following:
a. MCC height (less any removable lifting angles or eyes) b. MCC width
c. MCC depth
d. Location of shipping splits

2. Structure descriptions showing the following:
a. Bus ratings
b. Enclosure ratings
c. Short-circuit withstand ratings
d. Other information as required for approval

3. Conduit locations

4. Required bus splices

5. Unit descriptions including information such as, starter sizes, circuit breaker frame sizes, circuit-breaker continuous ampere ratings, and pilot devices

6. Nameplate information

7. Schematic wiring diagrams

8. Manufacturer drawings shall be provided in PDF format

9. List of recommended spare parts.

10. Catalog cut sheets:
a. Submit complete manufacturer’s catalog information
b. Clearly indicate the features of the equipment including any options necessary to meet the required functionality.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Layout Drawings:
a. Provide fully dimensioned and to scale layout Drawings which include:
b. Dimensions:
c. Overall length.
d. Overall width.
e. Overall height.
f. Overall weight and weight of individual shipping splits.

2. Interfaces to other equipment.

3. Shipping splits.

4. Allowable top and bottom conduit windows.

5. Complete component and unit layout Drawings.

6. Indicate lug sizes, type, and manufacturer based on the cable size specified and as indicated on the Drawings.

7. Elementary schematics:
a. Provide one custom schematic diagram for each compartment:
b. Include all remote devices.
c. Show wire numbers on the schematics:

8. External connection diagram showing the wiring to the external controls and devices associated with the motor control center.

9. Single-line diagrams:
a. Provide single-line diagrams for each motor control center, including but not limited to:
b. Circuit breakers.
c. Motor circuit protectors.
d. Motor starters.
e. Meters.
f. Relays.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 3

g. Timers.
h. C
ontrol devices.
i. Lighting transformers.
j. Distribution transformers.
k. Panelboards.
l. Surge protective devices.
o. Indicate electrical ratings of the equipment shown on the single-line diagrams.

D. Installation Instructions:

1. Provide a copy of the manufacturer’s installation instructions that includes the following:
a. Receiving, handling, and storage instructions
b. General description for reading nameplate data, serial numbers, UL markings, and short circuit ratings
c. Installation procedures including splicing procedures d. Conduit and cable installation
e. Installing and removing plug-in units
f. Operation of operator handles and unit interlocks
g. Checklist before energizing
h. Procedure for energizing equipment
i. Maintenance procedures

2. Provide anchorage instructions and requirements for the motor control center based on the seismic requirements at the project:
a. Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of California.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of all types of equipment furnished and/or installed under this section. Include the following:
a. Electrical ratings:
b. Phase.
c. Wire.
d. Voltage.
e. Ampacity.
f. Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions for the motor control center and all component parts, including:
g. Starters.
h. Overload relays and heater elements.
i. Protective devices including, but not limited to, fuses, circuit breakers, and protective relays.
j. Pilot devices.
g. Complete renewal parts list.

F. Record Documents:

1. The manufacturer shall provide final drawings reflecting the ‘As-Shipped’ state of the MCC documents previously submitted

2. Manufacturer drawings shall be provided in PDF format

3. Manufacturer drawings do not need to be stamped if a drawing schedule is provided that lists the drawing numbers, version levels, and status of drawings (such as, Preliminary, Approval, Final)

4. The contractor shall be responsible for making any changes to the ‘as-

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 4

shipped’ drawings from the manufacturer to reflect any field mod ifications

G. Calculations:

1. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the motor control center to prove the motor control center is suitable for the seismic requirements at the project site.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 registered facilities for the design, manufacture, and testing of MCCs.

B. MCC sections and individual MCC units shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with UL 845 requirements.

C. MCC sections and individual MCC units shall be UL listed, where possible

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Shipping splits shall be noted on the MCC manufacturer drawings.

B. The contractor shall store the MCCs in a clean, dry, and heated space.

C. The contractor shall protect the units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

D. During storage the contractor shall connect internal space heaters (if specified) with temporary power.

E. MCCs are to be shipped with external lifting angles at the top and running continuously for each shipping split. Lifting eyelets are not acceptable

1.7 NOT USED

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Conduct the initial fault current study and submit results for ENGINEER’s review.

B. After successful review of the initial fault current study, submit complete equipment submittal in accordance with Paragraph 1.05 of this specification for ENGINEER’s review.

C. Conduct internal factory test to ensure that systems and equipment are functional and submit Certified Test Results for ENGINEER’s review.

D. Ship equipment to the project site after successful completion of Factory Acceptance Test.

E. Assemble equipment in the field.

F. Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for ENGINEER’s review.

G. Submit manufacturer’s certification that the equipment has been properly installed

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 5

and is fully functional for ENGINEER’s revi ew.

H. Conduct OWNER’s training sessions.

I. Formally energize, start-up and commission equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following:

1. Allen-Bradley:
a. CENTERLINE 2100, no equal.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General:

1. Furnish motor control centers as specified and indicated on the Drawings.

2. Arrange the equipped sections side by side to form continuous motor control center lineups as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Identify any deviations from the Drawings in writing and submit for approval.

3. Provide complete and functional motor control centers.

4. Provide devices or accessories not described herein but necessary for the proper installation and operation of the equipment.

5. Provide new components of the latest construction series available from the manufacturer.

6. All MCC units shall have a full rated short-circuit rating that meets or exceeds the available fault current as shown on the contract drawings. a. The use of series short-circuit ratings shall be permitted only for panelboards; series short-circuit ratings for other types of units is not acceptable

7. All circuit breakers used in the motor control center shall have full-rated short-circuit interrupting ratings based on the applied MCC voltage. a. Slash rated short-circuit interrupting ratings for circuit breakers are not acceptable except for branch circuit breakers in panelboards, and then only if the power system specified in the contract drawings is a Wye with a solidly grounded neutral.

B. Design and construct motor control center to operate on a 240 volt, 3-phase, 3 wire 60 hertz solidly grounded system.

C. Bus System:

1. Material:
a. Silver-plated copper.
b. Short-Circuit rating:
1) 65,000 RMS symmetrical amps or as indicated on the Drawings, whichever is greater.
c. Bus Bar Supports:
1) High impact strength, non-tracking glass-polyester material that is

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 6

impervious to moisture and gases.

2. Horizontal Power Bus:
a. Current-carrying capacity of not less than as indicated on the Drawings. b. Mounting:
1) Mount horizontal bus bars edgewise, one above the other, and fully isolated from all wireways and units.
c. Temperature Rise:
1) Rated at 50 degrees Celsius temperature rise over a 40 degree Celsius ambient temperature.

3. Vertical Power Bus:
a. Current-carrying capacity of not less than 600 amps. b. Mounting:
1) Enclose the vertical bus in a polyester-glass cover with small openings to permit unit stabs to mate with the bus:
a) Provide a shutter mechanism to cover the stab openings when plug-in units are removed.
2) Provide top and bottom bus covers for insulation and isolation of the ends of the bus.
c. Isolated from the unit compartments by a full height barrier.

4. Ground Bus:
a. Horizontal Ground Bus:
1) Current-carrying capacity of not less than 600 amps. 2) Mounting:
a) Full-width, firmly secured to each vertical section structure:
(1) Located in the top or bottom wireway.
b) Pre-drilled and furnished with lugs for connection to equipment ground wires:
(1) Furnish a minimum of 10 lugs per vertical section of MCC. b. Vertical Ground Bus.
1) Mounting:
a) Furnish in each vertical section.
b) Bolted to the horizontal ground bus.
c) Install parallel to the vertical power bus.
d) Mount vertical ground bus such that plug-in units engage the ground bus before any connection to the power bus is made.

Upon removal of plug-in units, ground stabs are disconnected from the ground bus after the power stabs have been
disconnected.

5. Bus Splice Bars:
a. Provided to join the bus at the splits.
b. Connected to each horizontal bus bar with a minimum of two bolts. c. Employ conical or spring washers at connections, designed to maintain constant pressure against the splice joint.
d. Same ampacity rating as the horizontal bus.

D. Enclosures:

1. Each motor control center shall consist of 1 or more NEMA 12 vertical sections bolted together:
a. Freestanding.
b. Totally enclosed.
c. Dead-front assembly.
d. Designed for modification and/or addition of future vertical sections.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 7

e. Form each vertical section of heavy gauge steel.

2. Standard Section Dimensions:
a. Nominal height: 90 inches. Nominal depth: 20 inches. b. Vertical section width as indicated on the Drawings.

3. Wireways:
a. Provide each vertical section with a horizontal wireway at the top and bottom of the section:
1) Arranged to provide a full-width metal enclosed wiring trough across the entire motor control center assembly.
b. Provide each vertical section with a full-height vertical wireway. c. Completely isolated from the vertical and horizontal bus bars. d. Provide a removable, hinged door.

4. Shipping Splits:
a. No more than 3 vertical sections and not more than 60 inches in width. b. Solid bussing between vertical sections in a shipping split is not acceptable.

5. Lifting Angles:
a. Furnish each vertical section and/or shipping split with a removable lifting angle mounted to the top of the enclosure:
1) Extending the entire width of the shipping split.

6. Mounting Channels:
a. Mount each vertical section and/or shipping split on an external 1.5 inch by 3-inch mounting channel.

E. Units:

1. A plug-in unit consists of:
a. Unit assembly.
b. Unit support pan.
c. Unit door assembly.

2. Completely enclosed and isolated from adjacent units, buses, and wireways, except for conductor entries into the unit, by a metal enclosure.

3. Constructed so that any fault will be contained in the unit compartment.

4. Supported and guided by a removable unit support pan:
a. Re-arrangement of units and the removal of a unit so that a new and possibly larger unit can be added without the removal of an in-service unit to gain access to the unit support pan.

5. Held in place by screws or other positive locking means after insertion.

6. Provide a test position with the unit supported in the structure but disengaged from the bus.

7. Integral plug-in ground stab.

8. Stabs:
a. Free floating.
b. Self-aligning.
c. Backed by spring steel clips to ensure high pressure contacts:
d. Electrolytically tin-plated copper.

9. Handle:
a. Provide a flange mounted handle mechanism to operate each disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
b. Door mounted operators or operator handles are not acceptable. c. Engaged with the disconnect device at all times as an integral part of the unit independent of the door position.
d. Lockable in the “OFF” position with up to 3 padlocks.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 8

e. Mechanically interlocked so that the door cannot be opened with the handle in the “ON” position.
1) Provide a means for qualified personnel to defeat this interlock. f. Interlocked so the unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn with the handle in the “ON” position.
g. Color-coded to indicate position.
h. Located so the center of the grip when it is in its highest position is not more than 6 feet 7 inches above the finished floor, including the height of the housekeeping pad (4 inch) and mounting channels.

10. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide units for spaces and future equipment:
a. Equip these units to accept a future plug-in unit without modification to the vertical sections. Include bucket in all spaces.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Wiring:

1. Wire the motor control center in accordance with the following NEMA Class and Type as defined by NEMA ICS 18-2001:
a. NEMA Class II-S:
1) Furnish wiring diagrams for individual units consisting of drawings that identify electrical devices, electrical connections, and indicate terminal numbering designations.
2) Furnish individual unit diagrams with each unit and include inter- wiring between units, i.e. electrical interlocking, etc., as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents.
3) Provide custom drawings with unique terminal numbering designations in lieu of standard manufacturer Drawings. b. NEMA Type B Wiring:
1) Control wiring:
a) Type B-T pull-apart terminal blocks.

B. Pilot Devices

1. Where specified, units shall be furnished with pushbuttons, selector switches, or pilot lights as shown on the contract drawings

2. Pilot devices shall be rated NEMA Type 4/13 water tight/oil tight

C. Lugs and Terminals:

1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG wire or larger:
a. UL listed for copper or aluminum conductors.

2. Compression type, requiring a hydraulic press and die for installation.

3. Power terminal blocks shall be provided on all contactor and starter units, rated NEMA size 3 (100 A) and below that utilize vertically operated disconnects a. Power terminal blocks shall be pull-apart for NEMA size 1 and 2 (30 A and 60 A contactors)
b. Power terminal blocks for NEMA size 3 starters (100 A contactors) shall be non-pull-apart

D. Nameplates:

1. Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53. a. Identifying the motor control center designation as indicated on the

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 9

Drawings.

2. Identifying the vertical section:
a. Mounted and centered on the top horizontal wireway for each vertical section.

3. Furnish individual nameplates for each unit identified on the Contract Drawings:
a. 1 nameplate to identify the unit designation.
b. 1 nameplate to identify the load served.
c. Furnish space units with blank nameplates.

4. Manufacturer’s Labels:
a. Furnish each vertical section with a label identifying:
1) Serial number.
2) Bus rating.
3) Vertical section reference number.
4) Date of manufacture.
5) Catalog number of section.

2.4 DISCONNECTS

A. Main Disconnect.

1. Main Circuit Breaker Disconnect
a. Lugs to accommodate the incoming power conductors as indicated on the contract drawings.
b. Size the circuit breaker frame and trip rating as shown on the drawings c. The interrupting capacity rating shall meet or exceed the available fault current as shown on the contract drawings
1) Interrupting capacity based on a slash rating is not acceptable d. Provide a circuit breaker with thermal magnetic trip unit for 250 A and smaller frames; provide electronic trip unit for 400 A and larger frames e. Provide a removable protective barrier to reduce the possibility of incidental contact with the line terminals
f. Provide one normally open and one normally closed circuit breaker auxiliary contact that follows the position of the circuit breaker main contacts for indication of ‘On’ or ‘Off/Tripped’
g. For circuit breakers rated 1000 A and above, on Wye connected systems with a solidly grounded neutral, provide integrated ground fault protection with adjustable pick-up and adjustable time delay

B. Feeder Disconnects

1. Disconnecting means for feeders shall be circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units for 250 A and smaller frames; provide an electronic trip unit for 400 A and larger frames

2. Interrupting capacity rating shall meet or exceed the available fault current as shown on the contract drawings
a. Interrupting capacity based on a slash rating is not acceptable

3. Minimum frame size shall be 125 A

4. Provide one normally open and one normally closed circuit breaker auxiliary contact which follows the position of the circuit breaker main contacts for indication of ‘On’ or ‘Off/Tripped’

2.5 COMBINATION NEMA ACROSS THE LINE STARTERS

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 10

A. Starters shall meet applicable NEMA and UL requirements.

B. Starters shall be minimum NEMA Size 1.

1. Fractional NEMA sizes are not acceptable

C. Starters shall be provided with a 3-pole solid state overload relay that includes the following features:

1. Selectable trip classes of 10, 15, 20, or 30

2. Set for class 20 unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings

3. Overload protection

4. Phase loss protection

5. Trip current adjustment range of 5:1

6. Visual trip status indication

7. Test/Reset button

8. Bipolar latching relay with one normally open and one normally closed contact, rated NEMA B600 for use in motor contactor control circuits

9. Thermal memory circuit to model the heating and cooling effects of motor on and off periods

10. If ground fault protection is required, it shall have a selectable trip value between 20 mA and 5 A

D. In addition to the hold-in contact, starters shall be provided with one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact. The starter shall be capable of accommodating up to six contacts in addition to the hold-in contact.

E. Provide a control power transformer with a rated secondary voltage of 120V AC.

The control power transformer shall be provided with primary and secondary fusing. Size control power transformer at 150% of required load minimum.

F. Overload relays shall have a reset button located on the outside of the unit door.

G. Provide a door mounted selector switch for Hand-Off-Auto operation. The Hand mode shall provide local control at the MCC unit door. In the Auto mode, control shall be provided through a remote contact.

H. Provide door mounted 120V AC push-to-test pilot lights with LED lamps for On Red and Off Green status indication.

2.6 MOTOR STARTER UNITS

A. Electro-mechanical NEMA starters:

1. Disconnecting means for the across the line starters shall be motor circuit protectors

2. unit short circuit rating shall be greater than or equal to the available fault current as shown on the contract drawings

3. Units shall be supplied based upon the rules/requirements set forth in the UL 845, NEMA ICS-18, and NFPA 70

4. Contractor shall field adjust the units based upon the particular motor application.

5. Minimum MCP frame size shall be 125 A

6. Provide one normally open and one normally closed circuit breaker auxiliary contact that follows the position of the circuit breaker main contacts for

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 11

indication of ‘On’ or ‘Off/Tripped’

2.7 COMBINATION SOFT STARTER UNITS

A. Provide a control power transformer with a rated secondary voltage of 120V AC.

The control power transformer shall be provided with primary and secondary fusing.

B. The controller shall be Allen-Bradley SMC Flex and shall include the following features:

1. Integrated bypass contactor that is closed once the motor is up to full speed

2. Electronic overload protection with adjustable trip class

3. Four programmable auxiliary contacts

4. Selectable control capabilities: soft start, kickstart, current limit start, dual ramp, full voltage, linear speed, preset slow speed, soft stop

5. LCD display

6. Dorr mounted keypad programming for configuration

7. Built-in, selectable protective functions for: overload, jam, stall, excessive starts per hour, underload, over/under voltage, voltage unbalance

8. Metering capabilities for: current, voltage, kW, kWH, power factor, motor thermal capacity utilized, elapsed time

9. Ethernet IP/TCP interface.

10. Ground fault protection (1 A to 5 A) required

C. The SMC unit shall be provided with line side protective modules. The modules shall contain capacitors and metal oxide varistors (MOVs) that protect the internal power circuitry from severe electrical transients and/or high electrical noise.

D. Provide door-mounted pilot devices as shown on the contract drawing wiring diagrams.

E. Provide door-mounted 120V AC push-to-test pilot lights with LED lamps for On Red and Off Green status indication.

2.8 MOTOR STARTER UNITS

A. Solid State Controllers (solid-state reduced voltage motor controllers and variable frequency drives)

1. Disconnecting means for solid-state controllers shall be an Inverse Time circuit breaker

2. Short circuit rating shall be 65,000 A (rms symmetrical)

2.9 CONTROL AND LIGHTING TRANSFORMER

A. Provide control and lighting transformers as shown on drawings. The rating shown on the drawings shall be the minimum acceptable rating.

B. The insulation shall be 180 °C insulation with 80 °C rise.

C. Provide a circuit breaker with thermal magnetic trip for primary protection.

D. Provide a secondary fuse protection for the transformer.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 12

The primary circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment shall be i
nterlocked together and factory wired together.

E. Unit construction is dependent on the MCC NEMA enclosure type.

1. Units in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure shall be provided with vented doors

2. Units in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure with gasketed doors shall be provided with filters over the vent openings

3. Units in a NEMA Type 12 enclosure shall be provided with a non-vented door. If transformer derating is required, then the transformer shall be upsized to provide equivalent rating as shown on the contract drawings

F. Control and power transformers that are specifically designed for use in motor control centers and for use with motor control circuits are exempt from NEMA TP-1 energy efficient requirements.

G. Disconnecting means for transformers shall be circuit breakers with thermal- magnetic trip units for 250 A and smaller frames; provide an electronic trip unit for 400 A and larger frames

2.10 LIGHTING and POWER PANELBOARD

A. Provide lighting panel as shown on the drawings.

B. Lighting panel shall be rated for 10 kA interrupting capacity.

C. Provide bolt-on branch breakers as shown on the drawings.

2.11 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)

A. Bus connected surge protection: Provide industrial grade suppression filter system as manufac
tured by Allen Bradley.. The unit shall be designed to occupy a 6-inch or 12- inch MCC compartment, and shall have the following ratings and features:

a. 200 KA single pulse surge capacity per phase.
b. UL 1449 high performance suppression system
c. UL 1283 high frequency extended range power filter
d. UL 845 listed
e. Minimum No. 6 AWG copper conductor in the surge suppression path f. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) 115 percent of nominal g. Status and disturbance indicators
f. Integral breaker
g. Dry output contact for remote trouble alarm

2.12 FINISHES

A.

Finish interior surfaces including bus support angles, control unit back plates, and top an
d bottom barrier plates with baked white enamel.

B. Finish exterior of enclosure with manufacturer standard color.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 13

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install the motor control center per the manufacturer’s guidelines and submitted installation instructions to meet the seismic requirements at the project site.

B. General:

1. Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other accessories necessary to completely install the motor control center for the line, load, and control connections.

2. Assemble and install the motor control center in the locations and with the layouts as indicated on the Drawings.

3. Make bus splice connections.

4. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and shop drawings.

5. Furnish all components, and equipment necessary to complete the installation.

6. Replace hardware, lost or damaged during installation or handling, in order to provide a complete installation.

C. Install the MCC on a 4 inch raised concrete housekeeping pad: Provide openings in the top or bottom of the motor control center for conduit only. No additional openings will be accepted:

1. Mis-cut holes will require that the entire vertical section or removable panel be replaced. No hole closers or patches will be accepted.

D. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit:

1. Label all wires at each end with wire numbers as shown on the approved elementary schematics.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide the services of a manufacturer’s representative to:

1. Inspect, verify, and certify that the motor control center installation meets the manufacturer’s requirements.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, ENGINEER, or testing firm.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Demonstrate the operation of the motor control center to the ENGINEER’s and OWNER’s satisfaction.

B. Training:

1. Provide training for motor control center components in accordance with the individual component specifications.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMROVEMENTS

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 44 00 - 14

END

OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL DEVICES
26 44 42 - 1

SECTION 26 44 42
CON

TROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provisions: Applicable provisions of Section 260100 become a part of this Section as i
f repeated herein.

B. Work Included: Furnish and install all control devices complete, including, as applicab
le, enclosures, engraved escutcheons or nameplates, gaskets, lenses, lamps and mounting provisions.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications:

1. ICS1 General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems

2. ICS2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies

3. ICS6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit material or equipment data in accordance with the Product Review category o f
the General Conditions and the submittal requirements of Section 260100.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. All control devices shall conform to applicable provisions of NEMA Standa
rds ICS1 and ICS2.

2.2 CONTROL AND TIMER RELAYS
A. General: Relays shall be provided as necessary to perform switching functions requir
ed of control panels and other control circuits. Relays shall be of the following types (abbreviations in parentheses correspond to labels on the Drawings):

1. Size 0 Magnetic Contactors: Provide Size 0 magnetic contactors for driving S
ize 4 and Size 5 ac operated motor starters. Motor starters shall be Allen Bradley Bulletin 500 NEMA rated.

2. Relays:
a. Provide machine tool relays for the following applications:

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL DEVICES
26 44 42 - 2

(1) All relays driving 120 Vac motor starters up to and includ
ing Size 3.
(2) All relays driving non-motor loads up to 6 amps (or 720
VA).
b. Provide machine tool type relays with convertible contacts rated 10 amper
es continuous with NEMA Rating Designation A600 for
ac applications and N600 for dc applications. Coils shall be designed for continuous duty and shall have the voltage rating indicated on the Drawings.
c. Relays shall be the magnetically held type unless designated otherwise
on the Drawings. For each relay provide one spare
Form C contact over and above the number indicated on the Drawings. In addition, for latching relays, provide coil clearing contacts as necessary.
d. Manufacturer: Square D, Class 8501, Type X; General Electric CR120B
; or equal.

3. General Purpose Control Relays (plug-in):
a. Provide plug-in style 2-, 3-, or 4-pole enclosed relays with integral neon
or LED indicators for the following applications:
(1) Relay logic (relays driving other relays, including machine tool
relays) operating at voltages up to 120 Vac.
(2) Control power switching.
(3) All relays driving non-motor loads up to 2 amps (240 VA) at 120
Vac.
b. Provide relay sockets rated for 10 amp, 240 Vac with screw-type barri
ered terminals.
c. Manufacturer: Square D, Class 8501, Type R; Allen-Bradley Bulletin
700; or equal.

4. Analog or Digital Signal Switching Relays: Provide plug-in style indicating type r
elays with gold plated silver contacts for switching low level currents (less than 100 mA). Provide relay sockets screw-type barriered terminals.

5. Latching Relays: Latching relay shall be general purpose plug-in relay, two-
coil magnetically held with an integral neon or LED indicators. Relay contacts shall be rated for 10 amp, 240 volts with coil voltage as shown on the Drawings. Relay shall be complete with socket and shall be Square D, Class 8501, Type K; Idec RR2KP Series; or equal.

6. Timing Relays:
a. One shot relays shall have LED on indication with dip switch setting
for time adjustment. Relays shall be plug-in type with
matching base. Provide ATC TBE series or approved equal.

7. General Requirements:
a. Provide relays rated for 1 million operations at 10 amp, 120 Vac, at power
factor of 0.2.
b. Where timing relays are interfaced to motor starters or adjustable speed m
otor controllers, provide auxiliary machine-tool relays or

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL DEVICES
26 44 42 - 3

Size 0 magnetic contactors. Refer to previous specifications for machi
ne-tool relays and Size 0 magnetic contactors.
c. Where timing relays or control relays require additional contacts, provide au
xiliary control relays, properly sized for the application as described previously in this Section.

2.3 INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAYS
A. Unit shall be fixed sensitivity type and either UL or FM approved for use wit h a remote pilot device (dry contact) located in Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D atmospheres. Supply power shall be 120 Vac, 60 Hz. Provide load contacts as shown on the Drawings, except provide a minimum of one single-pole double- throw set. Contact ratings shall be 10 amperes or better at 120 Vac. Unit shall be Stahl ; or equal.

2.4 PUMP SEAL FAIL RELAYS

A. Provide pump seal fail relays as indicated in the Drawings. Relays shall be Flyght
MiniCas 2 door mounted type (120 vac).

2.5 CONTROL PANEL ACCESSORIES
A. Relays, timers and other internally mounted equipment shall be of the types specifi
ed in other sections of these Specifications.

B. Panel face mounted equipment shall be of the types specified in other sections of these Speci
fications.

C. Standards: All control devices shall conform to applicable provisions of NEMA Stan
dards ICS 1 and ICS 2.

D. Pushbuttons, Selector Switches and Pilot Lights:

1. Shall be heavy-duty oiltight units; each unit shall have an engraved escutcheon
plate unless nameplates are indicated on the Drawings or are necessary because of length of identification. Pushbuttons and selector switches shall have contacts rated 10 amperes continuous, Rating Designation A600 in conformance with NEMA ICS 2.

2. Indicating lights shall be push-to-test transformer LED type with lenses of
the colors shown on the Drawings.

E. Multiposition control switches shall have rotary action, round knurled handle and the
number of positions and stages shown on the Drawings. They shall be suitable for panel mounting. Each position shall have a positive detent. Contacts shall have a continuous current rating of 10 amperes at 300 Vac. Switches shall have integral indicator.

F. For 4-20 mAdc and 1 to 5 Vdc signal selector switches, provide oiltight selector swi
tches with electronic duty gold contact blocks. Provide sliding contacts for reliable operation without benefit of thermal cleaning action.

G. Colors and Descriptions:

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL DEVICES
26 44 42 - 4

1. Indicating Lamps: Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, the following color cod
e and inscriptions shall be followed for the lenses of all indicating lights.

Indicating Lamp
Inscription Color
ON/START Red
OFF/STOP Green
CLOSED Green
LOW Amber
FAIL Red
HIGH Amber
OPEN Red
POWER ON White
RESET Red
AUTO Blue

2. Lettering shall be black on white and amber lenses. Lettering shall be whit
e on red and green lenses.

3. Pushbuttons: Follow color coding for indicating lamp above.

4. All unused or noninscribed buttons shall be black. Lettering shall be black on whi
te and yellow buttons. Lettering shall be white on black, red and green buttons.

H. Nameplates: Unless specified otherwise in the Drawings, nameplates shall be black lamacoi
d with minimum 3/16-inch-high white letters for major area titles, 5/32-inch for component titles, and 1/8-inch for subtitles, and shall be fastened with a permanent but dissolvable adhesive or by screws.

2.6 CONTROL STATIONS
A. Provide control stations complying with NEMA ICS 6 for manual control functio ns as follows and as shown on the Drawings: start-stop pushbutton, hand-off-auto, forward-reverse-jog-stop, etc. Control stations shall include selector switches, pushbuttons, and indicators as specified in this Section.

B. Enclosures shall be as follows:

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA Type 4X

2. Hazardous Locations (Gases): NEMA Type 7
C. Nameplates: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate for each control station and escutcheon
s or nameplates for devices mounted thereon.

D. Provide pushbuttons, selector switches, indicators, etc., as shown on the Drawi
ngs and as required. Provide control devices with NEMA ratings matching that of the control station.

E. Manufacturer: Provide Allen-Bradley; Square D; Crouse-Hinds; or equal.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL DEVICES
26 44 42 - 5

2.7 M

ANUAL MOTOR STARTERS

A. Standards:

1. NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 2.

2. UL 508.

B. Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism that is lockable in the OFF position.

C. Types:

1. Horsepower rated, for ON/OFF control.

2. Horsepower rated, for ON/OFF control and thermal overload protection. a. Switch to clearly indicate ON and OFF position.

D. Voltage and current ratings and number of poles as required for the connected motor.

E. Enclosures:

1. NEMA 4X rated:
a. Thermoplastic.
b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges.

F. Manufacturers: Leviton Powerswitch MS4X or approved equal.

2.8 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. The disconnect switches shall be externally operate d with quick-make/quick-break
mechanisms. The handle shall be interlocked with the switch cover by means of a defeatable interlock device. The switch shall be padlockable in the "off" position.

Switches shall have nameplates stating manufacturer, rating, and catalog number.

Heavy-duty switches shall have arc suppressors, pin hinges, and shall be horsepower rated at 600-volts. All switches rated at 100 amperes or larger shall have auxiliary contact for remote status indication. Provide Heavy-duty switches for all motor circuits.

B. Switch rating shall match the horsepower requirements o f the load at the particular
voltage if not otherwise shown.

C. Switch enclosure shall meet the area classification re quirements. Enclosures shall
be NEMA 4X in outdoor, damp, and corrosive locations.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Square D

2. Cutler Hammer

3. General Electric

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS CONTROL DEVICES
26 44 42 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 G
ENERAL
A. Identify all control devices with engraved plastic nameplates or escutcheons, as applicab
le. Install control devices as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Coordinate with City software programmer for electronic overload relay settings.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 40 61 13-1

SECTION 40 61 13

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION
A. This section specifies general requirements applicable to Sections 40 61 13 through 40 67 00 for the process control, instrumentation, communication, network, and signal systems. Refer to Section 40 61 13 Appendix A reference drawings. Appendix A drawings represent City standards are for guidance only. The contractor shall modify the drawings and take full responsibility for the design to meet the specific project and site requirements. The enclosure shall have a maximum width indicated.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 1
B. Division 26

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:

1. Loop Diagrams
a. Prepared in accordance with ISA 5.4 – Loop Diagrams. b. Represent device element wiring of the system. Indicate device terminations for analog and discrete signals, with terminal numbers. c. Represent hardwire interlocks schematically.
d. Show circuit cable and wire cable numbers, signal polarities, and terminal block numbers.
e. Show connection to power supplies. Include alternating current (AC) and direct current (DC) power supplies and circuit information for instruments furnished under this contract.
f. Indicate controller or I/O card address/node, rack, slot, and point wiring terminals.
g. Show power supplies for signal loops. Indicate in which panel components reside and power originates with circuit numbering/name.

Where new/modified loops connect to an existing power supply, show the existing power supply name, location, and circuit.
h. Indicate surge protection type, manufacturer, and model number (i.e., types include floating ground reference or grounded reference). i. Show new and modified terminal blocks with numbering in new and existing panels.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 40 61 13-2

j. Indicate signal loop grounding terminations.
k. Indicate loop numbers, wire numbers, and cable numbers used in field wiring and panel wiring.
l. Indicate field element being controlled or monitored (i.e., normally open contact from relay CR17, or FIT 365).

B. Closeout Submittals:

1. Provide as-built drawing prints of drawings and schedules following project start-up, but prior to acceptance of the work, showing the final constructed state of the loop drawings in accordance with Division 1.

2. Provide redlined record drawing prints of drawings and schedules following project start-up, but prior to acceptance of the work, showing the final constructed state of the control panels and solar control panels.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers B. ISA – International Society of Automation
C. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association D. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association
E. NEC – National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
F. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
G. OSHA – US Department of Labor “Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards”

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Overall system performance, including but not limited to, control panels, solar control panels, field wiring, instrumentation, equipment, and process controls shall be demonstrated to the Owner and Engineer.

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION/DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. Process Control System: A process control system includes field devices (transmitters, limit switches, dry contact devices), industrial control panels where field I/O is terminated, programmable logic controllers (PLCs) where process control logic is executed, local human machine interfaces (HMIs) for local operator monitoring and control, and enterprise supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems. The process control system is used to monitor and control a process.

B. Panel: An instrument support system that may be a flat surface, partial enclosure, or complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems including consoles, cabinets, and racks. Panels provide mechanical protection,

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 40 61 13-3

electrical isolation, and environmental protection from dust, dirt, moisture, and chemical contaminants that may be present in the atmosphere.

C. Instrumentation: Field and panel instruments, analyzers, primary sensing elements, transmitters, power supplies, and monitoring devices.

D. Discrete Input: An electrical signal that is in one of two distinct states which is monitored by the process control system. Discrete inputs included in the process control system shall be 24VDC.

E. Discrete Output: An electrical signal that is in one of two distinct states which is controlled by the process control system. Discrete outputs included in the process control system shall be either 24VDC or 120VAC.

F. Analog Input: An electrical signal that represents a continuous, variable signal which is monitored by the process control system. Analog inputs included in the process control system shall vary linearly from 4mA as a minimum measurement to 20mA as a maximum measurement.

G. Analog Output: An electrical signal that represents a continuous, variable signal which is controlled by the process control system. analog outputs included in the process control system shall vary linearly from 4mA as a minimum command to 20mA as a maximum command.

PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL PROVISIONS 40 61 13-4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

APPENDIX A

SWPPP TEMPLATE

DWG SECTION SECTION DESCRIPTION
1 GEN
ERAL
2 NETWORK WIRING
3 AC POWER
4 DC POWER
5 MISCELLANEOUS
6 IO RACK 1
7 IO RACK 2
8 IO RACK 3
99 REPORTS (PANEL BUILDER REFERENCE ONLY)

DRAWING NUMBERING CONVENTION
X Y
. #

DRAWING SECTION NUMBER

SHEET LETTER

SUB SHEET NUMBER
(OP

TIONAL)

SHEET DWG DESCRIPTION
1 1

A TABLE OF CONTENTS
2 1B DRAWING SYMBOL KEY
3 1C CONSTRUCTION COMMENTS
4 1D.1 BILL OF MATERIAL (PART 1)
5 1D.2 BILL OF MATERIAL (PART 2)
6 1E.1 PANEL LAYOUT EXTERIOR DETAILS
7 1E.2 PANEL LAYOUT EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS
8 1E.3 PANEL LAYOUT EXTERIOR CONDUIT ENTRY
9 1F.1 PANEL LAYOUT INTERIOR DETAILS
10 1F.2 PANEL LAYOUT INTERIOR DIMENSIONS
11 1F.3 PANEL LAYOUT INTERIOR TOP VIEW
12 1G TERMINAL STRIP DETAIL
13 1H TERMINAL STRIP DETAIL DIGITAL
14 1I TERMINAL STRIP DETAIL ANALOG
15 1J PANEL COMPONENT DETAIL
16 1K.1 NAMEPLATE DETAIL (PART 1)
17 1K.2 NAMEPLATE DETAIL (PART 2)
18 1K.3 NAMEPLATE DETAIL (PART 3)
19 2A NETWORK WIRING
20 3A AC POWER DISTRIBUTION
21 4A.1 DC POWER DISTRIBUTION (PART 1)
22 4A.2 DC POWER DISTRIBUTION (PART 2)
23 5A PANEL I/O DETAIL
24 6A RACK 1 SLOT 1 DISCRETE INPUT
25 6B RACK 1 SLOT 2 DISCRETE INPUT
26 6C RACK 1 SLOT 3 DISCRETE INPUT
27 6D RACK 1 SLOT 4 DISCRETE INPUT
28 6E RACK 1 SLOT 5 DISCRETE OUTPUT
29 6F RACK 1 SLOT 6 ANALOG INPUT
30 7A SCADA PURCHASE LIST (PART 1)
31 7B SCADA PURCHASE LIST (PART 2)
32 7C SCADA WIRE REPORT (PART 1)
33 7D SCADA WIRE REPORT (PART 2)
(SPECIFICATION SECTION 40 61 13 APPENDIX A)
NOT

FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1A

DRAWING SYMBOL KEY
COM

PONENT TAG

NORMALLY OPEN
STA

TUS CONTACT

CROSS REFERENCE

NORMALLY CLOSED
STA

TUS CONTACT

CROSS REFERENCE

C/B RATING
CB1X01
TB-XX
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
1X22 MFG NAME XXXXXXX
1X23
1X24 MFG NAME XXXXXXX
1X25

TERMINALS
NOT

JUMPERED

TERMINALS
JUM
PERED
GND3A01

COMPONENT TAG

C/B RATING
CB1X01

CIRCUIT BREAKER
LOC

ATION CROSS REFERENCE

COMPONENT TAG

NORMALLY OPEN
CON

TACT LOCATION

CROSS REFERENCE

NORMALLY CLOSED
CON

TACT LOCATION

CROSS REFERENCE

NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT
NOR

MALLY CLOSED CONTACT

RELAY COIL
LOC

ATION CROSS REFERENCE

RELAY COIL
LOC

ATION CROSS REFERENCE

PANEL-MOUNTED

GROUND BUS
T

ERMINAL STRIP JUMPER DETAILS

WIRE JUMPERS
(BE
TWEEN

TERMINALS)

MECHANICAL

JUMPERS

CONTROL RELAY
(WI

TH CONTACT CROSS REFERENCE)

SINGLE-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER

SINGLE-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
(WITH AUXILIARY STATUS CONTACTS)

PREFIX DESCRIPTION

BAT BATTERY

CB CIRCUIT BREAKER

CBL CABLE

GND GROUND BAR

HTR HEATER

LS LIMIT SWITCH

LSA LIGHTNING SURGE ARRESTER

LT LIGHT

NETSW ETHERNET NETWORK SWITCH

PB PUSH BUTTON

PD POWER DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BLOCK

PSU POWER SUPPLY

RECP RECEPTACLE

SS SELECTOR SWITCH

TB TERMINAL BLOCK

TC THERMOCOUPLE CONVERTER

TR TIMER RELAY

TSTAT THERMOSTAT

UPS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
XX YY ##
COM

PONENT PREFIX

DRAWING SHEET NUMBER

COMPONENT NUMBER
(SE

QUENTIAL)

COMPONENT TAG NAMING CONVENTION
SHT

XX - Y Z

LOCATION CROSS REFERENCE CONVENTION

DRAWING SHEET
NUMBER

SHEET COLUMN LETTER

SHEET ROW NUMBER
A B
1 2

SHEET LOCATION
COL

UMN LETTER

SHEET LOCATION
ROW
NUMBER

WIRE OFF SHEET
CRO

SS REVERENCE

WIRE NUMBER

WIRE LOCATION
SHE

ET REFERENCE

SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
SELECTOR SWITCH, 2-POLE
(TO
P: NO, BOTTOM: NC)

PILOT LIGHT, PUSH-TO-TEST
(COLOR: A=AMBER, G=GREEN, R=RED)A

DIGITAL FIELD DEVICE
ANA

LOG FIELD DEVICE

LIMIT SWITCH NORMALLY CLOSED

LIMIT SWITCH NORMALLY OPEN

PUSH BUTTON NORMALLY OPEN

PUSH BUTTON NORMALLY CLOSED

MUSHROOM HEAD PUSH BUTTON

RADIANT HEATER

HORN OR BUZZER

GENERIC DEVICE

ELECTRICAL SYMBOL DEFINITIONS
BILL OF MATERIAL TAG # REFERENCE
BUB
BLE
DUPLEX
REC

EPTACLE

SPECIAL
CHA
RACTER

DESCRIPTION
L 120VAC POWER LINE VOLTAGE
N 120VAC POWER NEUTRAL
+ 24VDC POSITIVE
- 24VDC NEUTRAL

G GROUND

OTHER (A-Z) UNIQUE WIRE DESIGNATOR
YY ## A

DRAWING

SHEET NUMBER

WIRE NUMBER
(SE

QUENTIAL)

SPECIAL DESIGNATOR
CHARA

CTER (OPTIONAL)

WIRE NUMBERING CONVENTION

FUSE NUMBER

TERMINAL STRIP

WIRE NUMBER

FUSE RATING
RED #12 AWG MTW

WIRE COLOR, SIZE, AND TYPE
DES

IGNATION

WIRE TYPE SYMBOLS

FIELD WIRING INTERNAL PANEL
WIR
ING
SHLD

SHIELDED MULTI-CONDUCTOR
CAB

LE WITH DRAIN WIRE

MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE

CABLE TAG INDIVIDUAL
CON

DUCTOR COLOR

FUSED TERMINAL
DISCON

NECT TERMINAL
(FOR ANALOG SIGNAL TESTING)

FEED-THROUGH TERMINAL

GROUND TERMINAL
(CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO DIN RAIL)
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1B

PANEL CONSTRUCTION COMMENTS AND SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
ISOLATED DIN RAIL:

EAC
H ISOLATED DIN RAIL SHALL BE INSTALLED ON INSULATED STANDOFFS TO CREATE ISOLATION BETWEEN THE DIN RAIL AND THE BACK PANEL.

EACH DIN RAIL WILL HAVE A SINGLE GROUNDING TERMINAL BLOCK, WHICH IS TO BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE GROUND BUS WITH A SINGLE CONDUCTOR OF #14AWG (GREEN) WIRE.

THE TERMINAL STRIPS LISTED TOGETHER BELOW SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE SAME, CONTINUOUS ISOLATED DIN RAIL.

THIS REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO:

TB-AI-1
TERMINAL BLOCKS:

FOR
THE FOLLOWING TERMINAL BLOCKS, FIELD WIRING TERMINATES ON THE LEFT AND PANEL WIRING TERMINATES ON THE RIGHT.

THIS REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO:

TB-DI-1
TB-DO-1
FOR THE FOLLOWING TERMINAL BLOCKS, FIELD WIRING TERMINATES ON THE RIGHT AND PANEL WIRING TERMINATES ON THE LEFT.

THIS REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO:

TB-AI-1

TB-DO-RELAY
FOR THE FOLLOWING TERMINAL BLOCKS, ALL PANEL WIRING SHALL TERMINATE ONLY ON THE PANEL SIDE OF THE TERMINAL. DO NOT TERMINATE PANEL WIRING ON THE FIELD SIDE OF THE TERMINAL.

THIS REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO:

TB-DI-1
TB-DO-1
INPUT LSA (LSA3A01) IS TO BE MOUNTED AND WIRED SUCH THAT FIELD TE RMINATIONS ARE ON THE RIGHT AND PANEL WIRING IS ON THE LEFT.

GROUND BUS:

MOU
NT GROUND BUS DIRECTLY TO BACK PANEL. BOND GROUND BUS STRIPS TOGETHER WITH SINGLE CONDUCTOR AT ONE END ONLY, #6AWG (GREEN) WIRE.

BOND THE GROUND STUD ON ENCLOSURE DOORS DIRECTLY TO ENCLOSURE GROUNDING STUD(S) USING SINGLE CONDUCTOR OF #14AWG (GREEN) WIRE.

DO NOT GROUND CONTROL COMPONENTS TO BACK PANEL. RUN SINGLE CO NDUCTORS DIRECTLY TO GROUND BUS AS SHOWN ON SHEET 3A OF DRAWING SET.

ENCLOSURE AND PANEL ASSEMBLY:

PAN
EL IS TO BE CONSTRUCTED IN CONFORMANCE WITH NEC (INCLUDING ARTICLE 409) AND UL 508A AND BEAR THE APPROPRIATE UL 508A INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANEL LABEL CONFIRMING THE CONSTRUCTION.

BATTERY SENSOR MODULE TO BE INSTALLED TO BACK PANEL USING ZINC PLATED STANDOFFS. INSTALL NYLON WASHERS ON BOTH SIDES OF BOARD AT EACH MOUNTING SCREW.

ATTACH WIRE DUCT TO PANEL WITH METAL FASTENERS.

ENCLOSURE DOOR STOP TO BE INSTALLED WITH WELDED STUDS ON THE DOOR AND BOLTS WITH SEALI NG WASHERS ON THE ENCLOSURE.

ROUTER IR1101 AND ANTENNA ANT-4-5G4-O TO BE PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER AND ASSEMBLED BY CONTRACTOR.

DEVICE LABELS:

UNL

ESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, ALL COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS ARE TO BE SELF ADHESIVE POLYESTER WITH BLACK THERMAL PRINTED TEXT.

ADDITIONAL COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS ARE TO BE MOUNTED ON THE FRONT OF EACH DEVICE. ALL LABELS TO BE OF UNIFORM SIZE AND FONT. TEXT TO MATCH THE LABEL ON THE END BRACKET NEXT TO THE DEVICE.

THIS REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO:

ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PSU4A01 UPS4A01 ROUTER OIT01 FAN01 TSTAT3A01 TSTAT6D01
WIRE AND TERMINAL MARKING:

ALL
WIRE AND TERMINAL LABELS TO BE COMPUTER PRINTED. NO HAND-WRITTEN TERMINAL OR WIRE NUMBERS ALLOWED

LABEL ALL TERMINALS WITH TERMINAL MANUFACTURE MARKER STRIPS LABEL ALL WIRE/CABLE WITH HEAT SHRINK MARKING SLEEVES.

PANEL WIRING:

USE
DUAL WIRE FERRULES WHENEVER 2 WIRES ARE INSERTED INTO A SINGLE TERMINATION POINT.

DO NOT ROUTE WIRES AGAINST OR FASTENED TO COOLING VENTS OF CONTROL COMPONENTS.

DO NOT ROUTE PANEL WIRING INSIDE WIRE DUCTS THAT ARE MARKED AS FIELD WIRING DO NOT USE NYLON TIE WRAPS INSIDE WIRE DUCT.

WIRES AND CABLES ROUTED OUTSIDE OF WIRE DUCTS SHALL BE FIXED TO ENCLOSURE WITH WIRE SADDLES AT A MINIMUM OF EVERY 4 INCHES.

WIRE SADDLES ARE TO BE MOUNTED USING THREADED STUDS WELDED TO ENCLOSURE, DO NOT U SE ADHESIVE BACKED WIRE SADDLES.

WIRES AND CABLES ROUTED TO DOORS SHALL BE FLEXIBLE AND WRAPPED IN A WIRE LOOM. SECURE WIRING ON EACH SIDE OF THE HINGE SO THAT ANY BENDING OR TWISTING WILL BE AROUND THE LENGTH OF THE WIRE.

HEATER WIRES TO BE ROUTED BELOW BACK PANEL ON INSIDE OF ENCLOSURE.

WIRE COLOR AND SIZES:

UNL
ESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE DRAWING SET, ALL WIRES TO BE SIZED AND COLORED AS FOLLOWS:
120VAC = RED, 14 AWG, MTW
120VAC NEUTRAL = WHITE, 14 AWG, MTW
120VAC NOT DISCONNECTED BY PANEL'S MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER = ORANGE, 14 AWG, MTW 24VDC = BLUE, 16 AWG, MTW
N-DC = WHITE/BLUE, 16 AWG, MTW
GROUND = GREEN, 14 AWG, MTW
DISCRETE INPUTS = BLUE, 18 AWG, MTW, OR MANUFACTURES MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE DISCRETE OUTPUTS = YELLOW, 18 AWG, MTW
ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS = PURPLE, 18 AWG, MTW

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1C
ALL BILL OF MATERIAL ITEMS ARE "NO EQUAL" TO MATCH EXISTING STANDARDS, AND SHALL BE PROVIDED AS LISTED.

TAG Q
TY MANUFACTURER PART # DESCRIPTION
BACKPANEL 1 HOFFMAN A72P48F1 ENCLOSURE BACKPANEL 60" X 44" WHITE BAT4A03 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1134645 BATTERY MOUNTING CASE M, WALL AND SURFACE MOUNTING BATTERY CONTAINER 2 DURACELL SLADC12-20C LEAD-ACID BATTERY, 20AH, 12VDC, 13.3 LBS CB3A00 1 EATON FAZ-D20/1-NA-SP CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, 1 POLE, DIN MOUNT, 20A, D CURVE 1 EATON Z-NHK CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, AUXILIARY SWITCH CB3A01 1 EATON FAZ-D10/1-NA-SP CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, 1 POLE, DIN MOUNT, 10A, D CURVE CB3A02 1 EATON FAZ-D4/1-NA-SP CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, 1 POLE, DIN MOUNT, 4A, D CURVE CB3A03 1 EATON FAZ-D4/1-NA-SP CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, 1 POLE, DIN MOUNT, 4A, D CURVE CB3A04 1 EATON FAZ-D4/1-NA-SP CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, 1 POLE, DIN MOUNT, 4A, D CURVE CB4A10 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-0.5A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 0.5A 80V 1 POLE 1 CBI SABBM54 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 13MM, BUSBAR MODULE SINGLE PHASE, METAL CB4A11 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-0.5A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 0.5A 80V 1 POLE CB4A12 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-0.5A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 0.5A 80V 1 POLE CB4A13 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-0.5A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 0.5A 80V 1 POLE CB4A14 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-6A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 6A 80V 1 POLE CB4A15 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-2A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A 80V 1 POLE CB4A16 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-6A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 6A 80V 1 POLE CB4A17 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-4A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 4A 80V 1 POLE CB4A18 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-2A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A 80V 1 POLE CB4A19 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-2A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A 80V 1 POLE CB4A20 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-4A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 4A 80V 1 POLE CB4A21 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-6A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 6A 80V 1 POLE CB4A50 1 CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-30A CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 30A 80V 1 POLE CR3A00 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2966249 RELAY MODULE 120VAC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO CR6E08 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2966786 CONTINUOUS PLUG-IN BRIDGE MECHANICAL JUMPER, 500MM, RELAY CR6E09 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO CR6E10 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO CR6E11 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO CR6E12 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO CR6E13 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO CR6E14 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO CR6E15 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO DINRAIL 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1201730 DIN RAIL
1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1201141 INSULATED DIN RAIL MOUNT
DUCT-AC-1" 1 PANDUIT F1X4LG6 NARROW FINGER, SLOTTED WIRING DUCT GRAY 1" WIDE X 4" DEEP 1 PANDUIT C1LG6 WIRING DUCT COVER - GRAY 1" WIDE
DUCT-DC-1.5" 1 PANDUIT F1.5X4LG6 NARROW FINGER, SLOTTED WIRING DUCT GRAY 1.5" WIDE X 4" DEEP 1 PANDUIT C1.5LG6 WIRING DUCT COVER - GRAY 1.5" WIDE
DUCT-DC-2" 1 PANDUIT F2X4LG6 NARROW FINGER, SLOTTED WIRING DUCT GRAY 2" WIDE X 4" DEEP 1 PANDUIT C2LG6 WIRING DUCT COVER - GRAY 2" WIDE
DUCT-DC-3" 1 PANDUIT F3X4LG6 NARROW FINGER, SLOTTED WIRING DUCT GRAY 3" WIDE X 4" DEEP 1 PANDUIT C3LG6 WIRING DUCT COVER - GRAY 3" WIDE
ENCLOSURE 1 HOFFMAN A724824SSFSDN4 FREE-STANDING TYPE 4X TWO-DOOR ENCLOSURES TAG QTY MANUFACTURER PART # DESCRIPTION
LSA3A01 1 EATON AGCF12030 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR, 120VAC, 20A LT5A01 1 BANNER WLB32C570PBQ WLB32 ADJUSTABLE LED WORKSTATION LIGHT 1 SQUARE D XZCP1141L5 M12 4 PIN CONNECTOR 16FT CABLE
MISC 14 PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N OIT01 1 ONLOGIC TC401R OIT, PANEL MOUNTED TOUCHSCREEN MONITOR, 12.1" HMI, 24VDC PD6E00 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 2966508 RELAY POWER TERMINAL
2 PHOENIX CONTACT 2966786 CONTINUOUS PLUG-IN BRIDGE MECHANICAL JUMPER, 500MM, RELAY PSU4A01 1 PULS CP20.241 1-PHASE POWER SUPPLY
RACK1ECR 1 AB 5069-ECR 5069 COMPACTLOGIX/COMPACT GUARDLOGIX RIGHT END CAP WITH ADAPTER RACK1S00 1 AB 5069-L320ER COMPACTLOGIX 5380, 2 MB USER MEMORY, 16 I/Os, 40 ETHERNET/IP DEVICES 1 AB 5069-RTB6-SCREW 6 PIN SCREW TYPE POWER TERMINAL CONNECTOR 1 AB 5069-RTB4-SCREW 4 PIN SCREW TYPE POWER TERMINAL CONNECTOR RACK1S01 1 AB 5069-IB16 5069 COMPACT I/O 16 CHANNEL 24V DC SINK INPUTE MODULE 1 AB 5069-RTB18-SCREW 18 PIN SCRE W TYPE TERMINAL CONNECTOR RACK1S02 1 AB 5069-IB16 5069 COMPACT I/O 16 CHANNEL 24V DC SINK INPUTE MODULE 1 AB 5069-RTB18-SCREW 18 PIN SCRE W TYPE TERMINAL CONNECTOR RACK1S03 1 AB 5069-IB16 5069 COMPACT I/O 16 CHANNEL 24V DC SINK INPUTE MODULE 1 AB 5069-RTB18-SCREW 18 PIN SCRE W TYPE TERMINAL CONNECTOR RACK1S04 1 AB 5069-IB16 5069 COMPACT I/O 16 CHANNEL 24V DC SINK INPUTE MODULE 1 AB 5069-RTB18-SCREW 18 PIN SCRE W TYPE TERMINAL CONNECTOR RACK1S05 1 AB 5069-OB16 5069 COMPACT I/O 16 CHANNEL 24V DC SOURCE OUTPUT MODULE 1 AB 5069-RTB18-SCREW 18 PIN SCRE W TYPE TERMINAL CONNECTOR RACK1S06 1 AB 5069-IF8 5069 COMPACT I/O 8 CHANNEL VOLTAGE/CURRENT ANALOG INPUT MODULE 1 AB 5069-RTB18-SCREW 18 PIN SCRE W TYPE TERMINAL CONNECTOR RECP3A01 1 HUBBELL GFR15I GFCI RECEPTACLE, 125V, 15A
1 HUBBELL 5320-0 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE GANG BOX PANEL MOUNT 1 HUBBELL SSJ26 GFCI RECEPTACLE COVER PLATE
ROUTER 1 CISCO IR1101 ROUTER, POWER INPUT 9.6 TO 60VDC, TEMP RATING: -40 TO 60C, 4 PORT ETHERNET 1 CISCO ANT-4-5G4-O DIRECT MOUNT OMNIDIRECTIONAL ANTENNA 1 EXISTING EXISTING CABLE CAT 6 ETHERNET CABLE
SHELF1 1 SAGINAW SCE-FS1212 FOLDING LAPTOP SHELF, 12" W X 12" H, WHITE STOP1 1 HOFFMAN ALGDSTOP2 LARGE ENCLOSURE DOOR STOP KIT STOP2 1 HOFFMAN ALGDSTOP2 LARGE ENCLOSURE DOOR STOP KIT SW5A01 1 TELEMECANIQUE ZCP21 LIMIT SWITCH BODY - ZCP - 1 NC + 1 NO - TERMINALS 1 TELEMECANIQUE ZCPEG11 CABLE GLAND ENTRY FOR LIMIT SWITCH 1 TELEMECANIQUE ZCE10 HEAD FOR LIMIT SWITCH - ZCE - STEEL END PLUNGER TB-AC-1 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348 END BRACKET LABEL FOR STRIP MARKING - KLM-A 1 AB 1492-EBL3 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L3 TYPE TERMINALS 4 AB 1492-L3 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 30-12AWG 8 AB 1492-M5X10 TERMINAL LABEL, 5mm X 10mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L 1 AB 1492-CJK5-50 50 IEC CENTER JUMPER, 10 PL 5mm, PLUG-IN TB-AI-1 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348 END BRACKET LABEL FOR STRIP MARKING - KLM-A 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N
24 AB 1492-L3 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 30-12AWG 82 AB 1492-M5X10 TERMINAL LABEL, 5mm X 10mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L 1 AB 1492-EBL3 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L3 TYPE TERMINALS 9 AB 1492-LG3 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, GROUNDING BLOCK, 1492-L 8 AB 1492-L3P TERMINAL BLOCK 1492, GRAY
8 AB 1492-FPK224 TERMINAL ACCESSORY 1492, BLACK

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1D.1
ALL BILL OF MATERIAL ITEMS ARE "NO EQUAL" TO MATCH EXISTING STANDARDS, AND SHALL BE PROVIDED AS LISTED.

TAG Q
TY MANUFACTURER PART # DESCRIPTION
8 EATON GMC-63MA CARTRIDGE FUSE 63MA
TB-BATT-1 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348 END BRACKET LABEL FOR STRIP MARKING - KLM-A 3 AB 1492-L6 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 22-8AWG 6 AB 1492-M6X12 TERMINAL LABEL, 6mm X 12mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L 1 AB 1492-CJL8-2 2 IEC CENTER JUMPER, 2 PL 8mm, PLUG-IN, YELLOW 1 AB 1492-EBL6 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L6 TYPE TERMINALS TB-DC-1 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348 END BRACKET LABEL FOR STRIP MARKING - KLM-A 2 AB 1492-CJK5-50 50 IEC CENTER JUMPER, 10 PL 5mm, PLUG-IN 3 PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N
26 AB 1492-L3 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 30-12AWG 52 AB 1492-M5X10 TERMINAL LABEL, 5mm X 10mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L 2 AB 1492-EBL3 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L3 TYPE TERMINALS TB-DI-1 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348 END BRACKET LABEL FOR STRIP MARKING - KLM-A 4 AB 1492-CJK5-50 50 IEC CENTER JUMPER, 10 PL 5mm, PLUG-IN 5 PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N
128 AB 1492-L3 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 30-12AWG 256 AB 1492-M5X10 TERMINAL LABEL, 5mm X 10mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L 4 AB 1492-EBL3 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L3 TYPE TERMINALS TB-DO-1 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348 END BRACKET LABEL FOR STRIP MARKING - KLM-A 1 AB 1492-EBL3 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L3 TYPE TERMINALS 34 AB 1492-L3 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 30-12AWG 68 AB 1492-M5X10 TERMINAL LABEL, 5mm X 10mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L 1 AB 1492-CJK5-50 50 IEC CENTER JUMPER, 10 PL 5mm, PLUG-IN TB-DOOR 2 PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N 1 PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348 END BRACKET LABEL FOR STRIP MARKING - KLM-A 1 AB 1492-EBL3 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L3 TYPE TERMINALS 5 AB 1492-L3 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 30-12AWG 10 AB 1492-M5X10 TERMINAL LABEL, 5mm X 10mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L TSTAT6D01 1 PFANNENBERG 17111000010 THERMOSTAT, VOLTAGE RATING: 240VAC, DC RATING 30W, TEMP RATING: 32 TO 140 F, N.C. W/ CONTACT SPRINGS, GREY, FLZ 520
UPS4A01 1 PULS UB20.241 DC UPS MODULE 24VDC, 20A OUTPUT, FOR 3.9AH TO 150AH BATTERY UPS4A02 1 PULS UZS24.100 SENSOR BOARD FOR BATTERY MODULES 3 MCMASTER CARR 93505A485 ZINC-PLATED STEEL THREADED 1/4" HEX STANDOFF 6 MCMASTER CARR 92150A104 NYLON SPACER
3 MCMASTER CARR 90272A108 ZINC PLATED STEEL HEX BOLT, #4-40 X 3/8"

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
1D.2
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE

HEAT DISSIPATION AREA
0" 3" 6" 12"
120VAC FROM: LP-XXX CKT XX

CHINQUAPIN

INSIDE OF DOOR
MOU

NTED TO

LAPTOP SHELF

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1E.1
721
8 0
0 0
481
8 0" 3" 6" 12"
120VAC FROM: LP-XXX CKT XX

CHINQUAPIN

INSIDE OF DOOR
MOUNT
ED TO

LAPTOP SHELF
57 343
4 0
603
8 0
0 431
2 361
8 241
8 241
8 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1E.2
0" 3" 6" 12"
120VAC FROM: LP-XXX CKT XX

CHINQUAPIN

INSIDE OF DOOR
MOUNT
ED TO

LAPTOP SHELF
0"
8"
0"0"
24"
0"
8"
287
8"
371
8"
0"0"
71 4"
24"

AVAILABLE CONDUIT ENTRY AREA
(24

VDC PREFERRED)

AVAILABLE CONDUIT ENTRY AREA
(12
0VAC PREFERRED)
93 4"
371
8"
113
4"

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1E.3
0" 3" 6" 12"

HEAT DISSIPATION AREA
GND3A01
GND3A02
SEE SHT 1J
SEE
SHT 1J
SEE SHT 1J BREAKERS
1" x 4"

1.5" x 4"
3" x 4"

1.5" x 4"

1.5" x 4"

1.5" x 4"
2" x 4" FIELD WIRING

1.5" x 4"
1" x 4"

1.5" x 4"

1.5" x 4"
2" x 4"
3" x 4"
ACC1
CR6E15
CR6E14
CR6E13
CR6E12
CR6E11
CR6E10
CR6E09
CR6E08 ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
SEE SHT 1J BREAKERS
PD6E00

1.5" x 4"
ACC1
ACC1

1.5" x 4" FIELD WIRING
ACC1
ACC3
ACC1
ACC3
ACC1
ACC3
2" x 4"
2" x 4"
1" x 4"
1" x 4"
1" x 4"

SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER
ACC1
ACC3
2" x 4" FIELD WIRING
ACC1
ACC1
ACC3
ACC5
ACC1
ACC3
ACC1
ACC3
ACC5
ACC7
ACC9

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1F.1
0 561
2 60
0 85
8 131
8 271
8 295
8 403
4 361
8 451
8 403
4 61
2 225
8 0" 3" 6" 12"
GND3A01
GND3A02
1" x 4"

1.5" x 4"
3" x 4"

1.5" x 4"

1.5" x 4"

1.5" x 4"
2" x 4" FIELD WIRING

1.5" x 4"
1" x 4"

1.5" x 4"

1.5" x 4"
2" x 4"
3" x 4"
ACC1
CR6E15
CR6E14
CR6E13
CR6E12
CR6E11
CR6E10
CR6E09
CR6E08 ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
ACC1
PD6E00

1.5" x 4"
ACC1
ACC1

1.5" x 4" FIELD WIRING
ACC1
ACC3
ACC1
ACC3
ACC1
ACC3
2" x 4"
2" x 4"
1" x 4"
1" x 4"
1" x 4"
ACC1
ACC3
2" x 4" FIELD WIRING
ACC1
ACC1
ACC3
ACC5
ACC1
ACC3
ACC1
ACC3
ACC5
ACC7
ACC9
153
4 187
8 11
2 487
8 353
4 393
4 3
4 23
4 61
4 121
8 10
281
8 295
8 87
8 11
2 367
8 107
8 44
13 4
155
8 263
4 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1F.2
0" 3" 6" 12"
0 48
0 241
8 RACK 1

TOP VIEW LOOKING DOWN
NOT
E: FRONT OF PANEL

HEAT DISSIPATION AREA
361
8 OIT01
75 8
BAT
4A03

RESERVED
FLO

OR SPACE

FOR CONDUIT
ENTRY

RESERVED
FLO

OR SPACE

FOR CONDUIT
ENTRY
221
4 21
8 46
257
8 73
8 23
111
8 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1F.3
TB-AC-1
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
TB-AC-1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
1004348
ACC1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
3A01N AB 1492-L3
3A02N AB 1492-L3
3A03N AB 1492-L3
3A04N AB 1492-L3
ACC2 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC3 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
TB-BATT-1
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
TB-BATT-1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
1004348
ACC1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
4A01 AB 1492-L6
4A02 AB 1492-L6
4A03 AB 1492-L6
ACC2 AB 1492-EBL6
ACC3 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886

TB-DOOR
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #

TB-DOOR PHOENIX

CONTACT
1004348
ACC1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
5A01 AB 1492-L3
5A02 AB 1492-L3
5A03 AB 1492-L3
5A04 AB 1492-L3
5A05 AB 1492-L3
ACC2 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC3 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
TB-DC-1
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
TB-DC-1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
1004348
ACC1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
4A10- AB 1492-L3
4A11- AB 1492-L3
4A12- AB 1492-L3
4A13- AB 1492-L3
4A14- AB 1492-L3
4A15- AB 1492-L3
4A16- AB 1492-L3
4A17- AB 1492-L3
4A18- AB 1492-L3
4A19- AB 1492-L3
4A20- AB 1492-L3
4A21- AB 1492-L3
4A30- AB 1492-L3
4A31- AB 1492-L3
4A32- AB 1492-L3
4A33- AB 1492-L3
4A34- AB 1492-L3
4A35- AB 1492-L3
4A36- AB 1492-L3
ACC2 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC3 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
4A30+ AB 1492-L3
4A31+ AB 1492-L3
4A32+ AB 1492-L3
4A33+ AB 1492-L3
4A34+ AB 1492-L3
4A35+ AB 1492-L3
4A36+ AB 1492-L3
ACC4 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC5 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1G
TB-DO-1
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
TB-DO-1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
1004348
ACC1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
6E00A AB 1492-L3
6E00B AB 1492-L3
6E01A AB 1492-L3
6E01B AB 1492-L3
6E02A AB 1492-L3
6E02B AB 1492-L3
6E03A AB 1492-L3
6E03B AB 1492-L3
6E04A AB 1492-L3
6E04B AB 1492-L3
6E05A AB 1492-L3
6E05B AB 1492-L3
6E06A AB 1492-L3
6E06B AB 1492-L3
6E07A AB 1492-L3
6E07B AB 1492-L3
6E08A AB 1492-L3
6E08B AB 1492-L3
6E09A AB 1492-L3
6E09B AB 1492-L3
6E10A AB 1492-L3
6E10B AB 1492-L3
6E11A AB 1492-L3
6E11B AB 1492-L3
6E12A AB 1492-L3
6E12B AB 1492-L3
6E13A AB 1492-L3
6E13B AB 1492-L3
6E14A AB 1492-L3
6E14B AB 1492-L3
6E15A AB 1492-L3
6E15B AB 1492-L3
6EV1+ AB 1492-L3
6EV1- AB 1492-L3
ACC2 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC3 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
TB-DI-1
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
TB-DI-1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
1004348
ACC1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
6A00A AB 1492-L3
6A00B AB 1492-L3
6A01A AB 1492-L3
6A01B AB 1492-L3
6A02A AB 1492-L3
6A02B AB 1492-L3
6A03A AB 1492-L3
6A03B AB 1492-L3
6A04A AB 1492-L3
6A04B AB 1492-L3
6A05A AB 1492-L3
6A05B AB 1492-L3
6A06A AB 1492-L3
6A06B AB 1492-L3
6A07A AB 1492-L3
6A07B AB 1492-L3
6A08A AB 1492-L3
6A08B AB 1492-L3
6A09A AB 1492-L3
6A09B AB 1492-L3
6A10A AB 1492-L3
6A10B AB 1492-L3
6A11A AB 1492-L3
6A11B AB 1492-L3
6A12A AB 1492-L3
6A12B AB 1492-L3
6A13A AB 1492-L3
6A13B AB 1492-L3
6A14A AB 1492-L3
6A14B AB 1492-L3
6A15A AB 1492-L3
6A15B AB 1492-L3
ACC2 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC3 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
6B00A AB 1492-L3
6B00B AB 1492-L3
6B01A AB 1492-L3
6B01B AB 1492-L3
6B02A AB 1492-L3
6B02B AB 1492-L3
6B03A AB 1492-L3
6B03B AB 1492-L3
6B04A AB 1492-L3
6B04B AB 1492-L3
6B05A AB 1492-L3
6B05B AB 1492-L3
6B06A AB 1492-L3
6B06B AB 1492-L3
6B07A AB 1492-L3
6B07B AB 1492-L3
6B08A AB 1492-L3
6B08B AB 1492-L3
6B09A AB 1492-L3
6B09B AB 1492-L3
6B10A AB 1492-L3
6B10B AB 1492-L3
6B11A AB 1492-L3
6B11B AB 1492-L3
6B12A AB 1492-L3
6B12B AB 1492-L3
6B13A AB 1492-L3
6B13B AB 1492-L3
6B14A AB 1492-L3
TB-DI-1
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
6B14B AB 1492-L3
6B15A AB 1492-L3
6B15B AB 1492-L3
ACC4 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC5 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
6C00A AB 1492-L3
6C00B AB 1492-L3
6C01A AB 1492-L3
6C01B AB 1492-L3
6C02A AB 1492-L3
6C02B AB 1492-L3
6C03A AB 1492-L3
6C03B AB 1492-L3
6C04A AB 1492-L3
6C04B AB 1492-L3
6C05A AB 1492-L3
6C05B AB 1492-L3
6C06A AB 1492-L3
6C06B AB 1492-L3
6C07A AB 1492-L3
6C07B AB 1492-L3
6C08A AB 1492-L3
6C08B AB 1492-L3
6C09A AB 1492-L3
6C09B AB 1492-L3
6C10A AB 1492-L3
6C10B AB 1492-L3
6C11A AB 1492-L3
6C11B AB 1492-L3
6C12A AB 1492-L3
6C12B AB 1492-L3
6C13A AB 1492-L3
6C13B AB 1492-L3
6C14A AB 1492-L3
6C14B AB 1492-L3
6C15A AB 1492-L3
6C15B AB 1492-L3
ACC6 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC7 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
6D00A AB 1492-L3
6D00B AB 1492-L3
6D01A AB 1492-L3
6D01B AB 1492-L3
6D02A AB 1492-L3
6D02B AB 1492-L3
6D03A AB 1492-L3
6D03B AB 1492-L3
6D04A AB 1492-L3
6D04B AB 1492-L3
6D05A AB 1492-L3
6D05B AB 1492-L3
6D06A AB 1492-L3
6D06B AB 1492-L3
6D07A AB 1492-L3
6D07B AB 1492-L3
6D08A AB 1492-L3
6D08B AB 1492-L3
6D09A AB 1492-L3
6D09B AB 1492-L3
6D10A AB 1492-L3
6D10B AB 1492-L3
6D11A AB 1492-L3
6D11B AB 1492-L3
6D12A AB 1492-L3
6D12B AB 1492-L3
TB-DI-1
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
6D13A AB 1492-L3
6D13B AB 1492-L3
6D14A AB 1492-L3
6D14B AB 1492-L3
6D15A AB 1492-L3
6D15B AB 1492-L3
ACC8 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC9 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1H
TB-AI-1
Num
ber Jumper Manufacturer Part #
TB-AI-1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
1004348
ACC1 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886
GND AB 1492-LG3
6F00+ AB 1492-L3P
6F00- AB 1492-L3
6F00B AB 1492-L3
6F00A AB 1492-L3
6F00G AB 1492-LG3
6F01+ AB 1492-L3P
6F01- AB 1492-L3
6F01B AB 1492-L3
6F01A AB 1492-L3
6F01G AB 1492-LG3
6F02+ AB 1492-L3P
6F02- AB 1492-L3
6F02B AB 1492-L3
6F02A AB 1492-L3
6F02G AB 1492-LG3
6F03+ AB 1492-L3P
6F03- AB 1492-L3
6F03B AB 1492-L3
6F03A AB 1492-L3
6F03G AB 1492-LG3
6F04+ AB 1492-L3P
6F04- AB 1492-L3
6F04B AB 1492-L3
6F04A AB 1492-L3
6F04G AB 1492-LG3
6F05+ AB 1492-L3P
6F05- AB 1492-L3
6F05B AB 1492-L3
6F05A AB 1492-L3
6F05G AB 1492-LG3
6F06+ AB 1492-L3P
6F06- AB 1492-L3
6F06B AB 1492-L3
6F06A AB 1492-L3
6F06G AB 1492-LG3
6F07+ AB 1492-L3P
6F07- AB 1492-L3
6F07B AB 1492-L3
6F07A AB 1492-L3
6F07G AB 1492-LG3
ACC2 AB 1492-EBL3
ACC3 PHOENIX

CONTACT
0800886

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1I

TB-DO-RELAYBREAKERS
CR6E08
CR6
E09
CR6E10
CR6E11
CR6E12
CR6E13
CR6E14
CR6E15
PD6E00

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1J
7"
1"
120VAC FROM: LPA CKT 4
NOT
E: LABEL TO BE CONSTRUCTED

AT A LATER TIME
NOTE: LABELS TO BE ENGRAVED TWO-LAYER UV
STABI

LIZED MATERIAL WITH WHITE TEXT NO LESS
THAN 14" H IGH ON BLACK BACKGROUND

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1K.1
2"
1"
1"
1 2"
NOTE: IDE NTIFICATION LABELS FOR COMPONENTS TO BE MOUNTED ON THE BACK

PANEL NEXT TO THE COMPONENT AS SHOWN ON THE PANEL LAYOUT INTERIOR DETAILS SHEET. LABELS TO BE SELF ADHESIVE POLYESTER WITH THERMAL PRINTED BLACK TEXT NO LESS THAN 1/4" HIGH.

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1K.2
13 4"
1 4"
TB-DC-1
TB-AC-1
TB-BATT-1
TB-DI-1
TB-AI-1

TB-DOOR

TB-DO-RELAY
UPS4A01
PSU4A01
TSTAT3A01
TB-DO-1
NOT
E: IDEN TIFICATION LABELS FOR DIN RAIL MOUNTED COMPONENTS TO BE MOUNTED ON THE END BRACKET NEXT TO THE COMPONENT OR TERMINAL STRIP.

LABELS TO BE MOUNTED ON THE LEFT OF HORIZONTAL DIN RAIL MOUNTED COMPONENTS AND ABOVE VERTICAL DIN RAIL MOUNTED COMPONENTS. LABELS

TO BE SELF ADHESIVE POLYESTER WITH THERMAL PRINTED BLACK TEXT NO LESS THAN 1/8" HIGH.

ROUTER
NOT

FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE1K.3

FIBER ETHERNET
COP

PER ETHERNET
SLOT 0
RACK 1
RACK1
S00
-
-

PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER

PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER
ROUTER
OIT01
NOT

FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE2A
CB3A00
CB3A01
CB3A02
CB3A03
CB3A04
GND
REC
P3A01
NOTE 1: 120VAC 1-PH/60HZ WITH FACILITY GROUND, SUPPLY
NOT TO EXCEED 20 AMPS SERVICE
SEL

CB AUX CONTACT MODE

SELECTOR ROTARY SWITCH
FOR CB3A00
CONTACT 4.XX ELECTRICAL TRIP
CON
TACT 1.XX GENERAL TRIP
RED #12 AWG MTW
WHT #12 AWG MTW
ORG #12 AWG MTW
CUSTOMER SUPPLY #1
*SEE
NOTE 1
GND3A01
GND3A02
A2 A1
Spare
NOT

FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE3A
PSU4A01
L2/N
GND
L
-
+
PULS
UB2

0.241
30S
1m
3m
1 0m
10s

BUFFER TIME

LIMITER
BUFFER

VOLTAGE

DC UPS SWITCH SETTINGS
25 26
24 22.5

BATTERY
SIZE
>10
AH
<10 AH
BLUE
#10

AWG MTW

WHT/BLUE
#10

AWG MTW
BLU #10 AWG MTW WHT/BLU #10 AWG MTW
WHT/BLU #10 AWG MTW
CB4A50
BAT4A03
NOT

FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE4A.1
CB4A15
CB4A10
CB4A11
CB4A12
CB4A13
CB4A14
CB4A16
CB4A17
CB4A18
CB4A19
CB4A20
CB4A21
RACK1S00
NOT

FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE4A.2
SW5A01
BLU #16 AWG MTW
BLU #16 AWG MTW BLU #16 AWG MTW
WHT/BLU #16 AWG MTW
BLU #18 AWG MTWBLU #18 AWG MTWBLU #18 AWG MTW
BLU #18 AWG MTW
NOT

FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE5A
NOTE: ALL PANEL WIRING ON TB- DI-1 SHALL TERMINATE ONLY ON THE PANEL SIDE OF THE TERMINAL. DO NOT TERMINATE
PANEL WIRING ON THE FIELD SIDE OF THE TERMINAL.
-
SLOT 1
RACK
1S01
RACK 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE6A
NOTE: ALL PANEL WIRING ON TB- DI-1 SHALL TERMINATE ONLY ON THE PANEL SIDE OF THE TERMINAL. DO NOT TERMINATE
PANEL WIRING ON THE FIELD SIDE OF THE TERMINAL.
-
SLOT 2
RACK
1S02
RACK 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE6B
NOTE: ALL PANEL WIRING ON TB- DI-1 SHALL TERMINATE ONLY ON THE PANEL SIDE OF THE TERMINAL. DO NOT TERMINATE
PANEL WIRING ON THE FIELD SIDE OF THE TERMINAL.
-
SLOT 3
RACK
1S03
RACK 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE6C
NOTE: ALL PANEL WIRING ON TB- DI-1 SHALL TERMINATE ONLY ON THE PANEL SIDE OF THE TERMINAL. DO NOT TERMINATE
PANEL WIRING ON THE FIELD SIDE OF THE TERMINAL.
-
SLOT 4
RACK
1S04
RACK 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE6D
A2A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
1 2 43
A1 A2 BB 1413
PAN
EL
PANEL
FIELD
FIELD
TOP
2966508 RELAY POWER DISTRIBUTION DETAIL
2909661 RELAY DETAIL
NOTE: ALL PANEL WIRING ON TB- DO-1 SHALL TERMINATE ONLY ON THE PANEL SIDE OF THE TERMINAL. DO NOT TERMINATE
PANEL WIRING ON THE FIELD SIDE OF THE TERMINAL.

SLOT 5
RACK 1
RACK
1S05
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Start / Stop Pump 1
Sta
rt / Stop Pump 2
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE6E
SHLD
SHLD
SHLD

SHLD SHLD
SHLD
SHLD
SHLD
-
SLOT 6
RACK
1S06
RACK 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RACK1S06

WIRE JUMPER

WIRE JUMPER

WIRE JUMPER

WIRE JUMPER

WIRE JUMPER

WIRE JUMPER

WIRE JUMPER

WIRE JUMPER
NOT

FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE6F
MANUFACTURER PAR T # QTY DESCRIPTION TAGS
AB 1492-CJK5-50 8 50 IEC CENTER JUMPER, 10 PL 5mm, PLUG-IN

HARDWARE
TB-AC-1
TB-DC-1
TB-DI-1
TB-DO-1
AB 1492-CJL8-2 1 2 IEC CENTER JUMPER, 2 PL 8mm, PLUG-IN, YELLOW

HARDWARE
TB-BATT-1
AB 1492-EBL3 10 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L3 TYPE TERMINALS

HARDWARE
GREY
TB-AI-1
TB-DC-1
TB-DI-1
TB-AC-1
TB-DO-1

TB-DOOR
AB 1492-EBL6 1 END BARRIER COMPATIBLE WITH 1492-L6 TYPE TERMINALS

HARDWARE
GREY
TB-BATT-1
AB 1492-FPK224 8 TERMINAL ACCESSORY 1492, BLACK

FUSE PLUG
LED INDICATOR, RATED VOLTAGE 10-36VAC/DC, LEAKAGE CURRENT 1.6mA AT 24VDC

FUSE ACCESSORY WITH BLOWN FUSE INDICATION
TB-AI-1
AB 1492-L3 221 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 30-12AWG

FEED-THROUGH
GRAY COLOR, 30-12AWG, RATED VOLTAGE 600VAC/DC

ONE-CIRCUIT FEED-THROUGH BLOCK
TB-AI-1
TB-DC-1
TB-DI-1
TB-AC-1
TB-DO-1

TB-DOOR
AB 1492-L3P 8 TERMINAL BLOCK 1492, GRAY

FUSE BLOCK
GREY COLOR, 30-12 AWG, RATED VOLTAGE 600VAC/DC

SINGLE CIRCUIT FUSE TERMINAL BLOCK WITH BLOWN INDICATION TB-AI-1
AB 1492-L6 3 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, STANDARD FEED-THROUGH BLOCK, 1492-L, 22-8AWG

FEED-THROUGH
GRAY COLOR, 22-8AWG, RATED VOLTAGE 600VAC/DC

ONE-CIRCUIT FEED-THROUGH BLOCK
TB-BATT-1
AB 1492-LG3 9 IEC SPRING CLAMP TERMINAL BLOCK, GROUNDING BLOCK, 1492-L

FEED-THROUGH GROUND
GREEN / YELLOW COLOR, 30-12AWG

ONE-CIRCUIT FEED-THROUGH GROUND BLOCK
TB-AI-1
AB 1492-M5X10 476 TERMINAL LABEL, 5mm X 10mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L

TERMINAL
TB-AI-1
TB-DC-1
TB-DI-1
TB-AC-1
TB-DO-1

TB-DOOR
AB 1492-M6X12 6 TERMINAL LABEL, 6mm X 12mm, INDIVIDUAL, SNAP ON, 1492-L

TERMINAL
TB-BATT-1
AB 5069-ECR 1 5069 COMPACTLOGIX/COMPACT GUARDLOGIX RIGHT END CAP WITH ADAPTER 5069
RACK1ECR
AB 5069-IB16 4 5069 COMPACT I/O 16 CHANNEL 24V DC SINK INPUTE MODULE 5069 COMPACTLOGIX
RACK1S01
RACK1S02
RACK1S03
RACK1S04
AB 5069-IF8 1 5069 COMPACT I/O 8 CHANNEL VOLTAGE/CURRENT ANALOG INPUT MODULE 5069 COMPACTLOGIX
RACK1S06
AB 5069-L320ER 1 COMPACTLOGIX 5380, 2 MB USER MEMORY, 16 I/Os, 40 ETHERNET/IP DEVICES 5069 COMPACTLOGIX
RACK1S00
AB 5069-OB16 1 5069 COMPACT I/O 16 CHANNEL 24V DC SOURCE OUTPUT MODULE 5069 COMPACTLOGIX
RACK1S05
AB 5069-RTB18-SCREW 6 18 PIN SCREW TYPE TERMINAL CONNECTOR 5069 COMPACTLOGIX
RACK1S01
RACK1S02
RACK1S03
RACK1S04
RACK1S06
RACK1S05
AB 5069-RTB4-SCREW 1 4 PIN SCREW TYPE POWER TERMINAL CONNECTOR 5069 COMPACTLOGIX
RACK1S00
AB 5069-RTB6-SCREW 1 6 PIN SCREW TYPE POWER TERMINAL CONNECTOR 5069 COMPACTLOGIX
RACK1S00
MANUFACTURER PAR T # QTY DESCRIPTION TAGS
BANNER WLB32C570PBQ 1 WLB32 ADJUSTABLE LED WORKSTATION LIGHT 24VDC
LT5A01
CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-0.5A 3 CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 0.5A 80V 1 POLE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB4A11
CB4A12
CB4A13
CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-0.5A 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 0.5A 80V 1 POLE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB4A10
CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-2A 3 CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A 80V 1 POLE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB4A15
CB4A18
CB4A19
CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-30A 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 30A 80V 1 POLE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB4A50
CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-4A 2 CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 4A 80V 1 POLE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB4A17
CB4A20
CBI QY-1-13-DM-U2-6A 3 CIRCUIT BREAKER - CBI CURVE U2 QY-(13) CIRCUIT BREAKER 6A 80V 1 POLE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB4A14
CB4A21
CB4A16
CBI SABBM54 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 13MM, BUSBAR MODULE SINGLE PHASE, METAL BUSBAR
CB4A10
CISCO ANT-4-5G4-O 1 DIRECT MOUNT OMNIDIRECTIONAL ANTENNA

ANTENNA
ROUTER
CISCO IR1101 1 ROUTER, POWER INPUT 9.6 TO 60VDC, TEMP RATING: -40 TO 60C, 4 PORT ETHERNET

NETWORK
ROUTER
DURACELL SLADC12-20C 2 LEAD-ACID BATTERY, 20AH, 12VDC, 13.3 LBS 12VDC
BAT4A03
EATON AGCF12030 1 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR, 120VAC, 20A 120VAC
LSA3A01
EATON FAZ-D10/1-NA-SP 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, 1 POLE, DIN MOUNT, 10A, D CURVE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
RATING=10A
CB3A01
EATON FAZ-D20/1-NA-SP 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, 1 POLE, DIN MOUNT, 20A, D CURVE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
RATING=20A
CB3A00
EATON FAZ-D4/1-NA-SP 3 CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, 1 POLE, DIN MOUNT, 4A, D CURVE 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
RATING=4A
CB3A02
CB3A03
CB3A04
EATON GMC-63MA 8 CARTRIDGE FUSE 63MA
FUSE
TB-AI-1
EATON Z-NHK 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER, UL 489 BRANCH, AUXILIARY SWITCH 1-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB3A00
EXISTING EXISTING CABLE 1 CAT 6 ETHERNET CABLE
CABLE
ROUTER
HOFFMAN A724824SSFSDN4 1 FREE-STANDING TYPE 4X TWO-DOOR ENCLOSURES

FREE-STANDING ENCLOSURE

72.06 x 48.06 x 24.06 IN, 304 STAINLESS STEEL, 3-POINT LATCHING HANDLE

DESIGNED TO PROTECT ELECTRICAL CONTROLS/COMPONENTS

ENCLOSURE
HOFFMAN A72P48F1 1 ENCLOSURE BACKPANEL 60" X 44" WHITE

BACKPANEL

BACKPANEL
HOFFMAN ALGDSTOP2 2 LARGE ENCLOSURE DOOR STOP KIT

ACCESSORY
STOP1
STOP2
HUBBELL 5320-0 1 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE GANG BOX PANEL MOUNT REC
RECP3A01
HUBBELL GFR15I 1 GFCI RECEPTACLE, 125V, 15A
REC
RECP3A01
HUBBELL SSJ26 1 GFCI RECEPTACLE COVER PLATE
REC
RECP3A01
MCMASTER CARR 90272A108 3 ZINC PLATED STEEL HEX BOLT, #4-40 X 3/8" NA
UPS4A02
MCMASTER CARR 92150A104 6 NYLON SPACER
NA
UPS4A02
MCMASTER CARR 93505A485 3 ZINC-PLATED STEEL THREADED 1/4" HEX STANDOFF NA
UPS4A02

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE99A.1
MANUFACTURER PAR T # QTY DESCRIPTION TAGS
ONLOGIC TC401R 1 OIT, PANEL MOUNTED TOUCHSCREEN MONITOR, 12.1" HMI, 24VDC OIT
OIT01
PANDUIT C1.5LG6 1 WIRING DUCT COVER - GRAY 1.5" WIDE

1.5 LIGHT GRAY
DUCT-DC-1.5"
PANDUIT C1LG6 1 WIRING DUCT COVER - GRAY 1" WIDE
1 LIGHT GRAY
DUCT-AC-1"
PANDUIT C2LG6 1 WIRING DUCT COVER - GRAY 2" WIDE
2 LIGHT GRAY
DUCT-DC-2"
PANDUIT C3LG6 1 WIRING DUCT COVER - GRAY 3" WIDE
3 LIGHT GRAY
DUCT-DC-3"
PANDUIT F1.5X4LG6 1 NARROW FINGER, SLOTTED WIRING DUCT GRAY 1.5" WIDE X 4" DEEP

1.75 x 4.12

LIGHT GRAY

LEAD-FREE PVC, STANDARD MOUNTING HOLES
DUCT-DC-1.5"
PANDUIT F1X4LG6 1 NARROW FINGER, SLOTTED WIRING DUCT GRAY 1" WIDE X 4" DEEP

1.25 x 4.08

LIGHT GRAY

LEAD-FREE PVC, STANDARD MOUNTING HOLES
DUCT-AC-1"
PANDUIT F2X4LG6 1 NARROW FINGER, SLOTTED WIRING DUCT GRAY 2" WIDE X 4" DEEP

2.25 x 4.09

LIGHT GRAY

LEAD-FREE PVC, STANDARD MOUNTING HOLES
DUCT-DC-2"
PANDUIT F3X4LG6 1 NARROW FINGER, SLOTTED WIRING DUCT GRAY 3" WIDE X 4" DEEP

3.25 x 4.11

LIGHT GRAY

LEAD-FREE PVC, STANDARD MOUNTING HOLES
DUCT-DC-3"
PFANNENBERG 17111000010 1 THERMOSTAT, VOLTAGE RATING: 240VAC, DC RATING 30W, TEMP RATING: 32 TO 140 F, N.C. W/ CONTACT SPRINGS, GREY, FLZ 520

THERMOSTAT
TSTAT6D01
PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 32 END BRACKET - E/NS 35 N

ACCESSORY
GRAY, FOR THE NS 35 DIN RAIL

9.5MM WIDTH
TB-AI-1
TB-DC-1
TB-DI-1
MISC
TB-AC-1
TB-BATT-1
TB-DO-1

TB-DOOR
PHOENIX CONTACT 1004348 7 END BRACKET LABEL FOR STRIP MARKING - KLM-A

ACCESSORY
TB-AC-1
TB-AI-1
TB-BATT-1
TB-DC-1
TB-DI-1
TB-DO-1

TB-DOOR
PHOENIX CONTACT 1134645 1 BATTERY MOUNTING CASE M, WALL AND SURFACE MOUNTING BATTERY CONTAINER

MOUNTING MATERIAL
BAT4A03
PHOENIX CONTACT 1201141 1 INSULATED DIN RAIL MOUNT
NA

DINRAIL
PHOENIX CONTACT 1201730 1 DIN RAIL
NA

DINRAIL
PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 7 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO RELAY
CR6E09
CR6E10
CR6E11
CR6E12
CR6E13
CR6E14
CR6E15
PHOENIX CONTACT 2909661 1 RELAY MODULE 24VDC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO RELAY
CR6E08
PHOENIX CONTACT 2966249 1 RELAY MODULE 120VAC COIL WITH BUSBAR TERMINAL 1NO RELAY
CR3A00
PHOENIX CONTACT 2966508 1 RELAY POWER TERMINAL

POWER TERMINAL
PD6E00
MANUFACTURER PAR T # QTY DESCRIPTION TAGS
PHOENIX CONTACT 2966786 3 CONTINUOUS PLUG-IN BRIDGE MECHANICAL JUMPER, 500MM, RELAY JUMPER
CR6E08
PD6E00
PULS CP20.241 1 1-PHASE POWER SUPPLY
24VDC
INPUT: 120VAC,50/60Hz / OUTPUT: 24VDC, 20A
PSU4A01
PULS UB20.241 1 DC UPS MODULE 24VDC, 20A OUTPUT, FOR 3.9AH TO 150AH BATTERY 24VDC
UPS4A01
PULS UZS24.100 1 SENSOR BOARD FOR BATTERY MODULES
24VDC
UPS4A02
SAGINAW SCE-FS1212 1 FOLDING LAPTOP SHELF, 12" W X 12" H, WHITE SHELF
12" X 10.43"
SHELF1
SCHNEIDER PK18GTA 2 LOAD CENTER ACCESSORY, QO/HOMELINE, GROUND BAR KIT, 18 TERMINAL GROUND
GND3A01
GND3A02
SQUARE D XZCP1141L5 1 M12 4 PIN CONNECTOR 16FT CABLE
CABLE
LT5A01
TELEMECANIQUE ZCE10 1 HEAD FOR LIMIT SWITCH - ZCE - STEEL END PLUNGER

COMPLETE PLUNGER HEAD
LINEAR
SW5A01
TELEMECANIQUE ZCP21 1 LIMIT SWITCH BODY - ZCP - 1 NC + 1 NO - TERMINALS

SNAP ACTION

USE WITH CABLE GLAND ENTRY
1 NC + 1 NO
SW5A01
TELEMECANIQUE ZCPEG11 1 CABLE GLAND ENTRY FOR LIMIT SWITCH

PLASTIC BODY
SW5A01

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE99A.2
WIRENO COMPONENT 1 PIN 1 COMPONENT 2 PIN2 WIRE TYPE
DV6F07 - TB-AI-1 6F07A FIELD
TB-AI-1 6F07+ DV6F07 + FIELD
DV6F03 - TB-AI-1 6F03A FIELD
TB-AI-1 6F03+ DV6F03 + FIELD
DV6F06 - TB-AI-1 6F06A FIELD
TB-AI-1 6F06+ DV6F06 + FIELD
DV6F02 - TB-AI-1 6F02A FIELD
TB-AI-1 6F02+ DV6F02 + FIELD
DV6F05 - TB-AI-1 6F05A FIELD
TB-AI-1 6F05+ DV6F05 + FIELD
DV6F01 - TB-AI-1 6F01A FIELD
TB-AI-1 6F01+ DV6F01 + FIELD
DV6F04 - TB-AI-1 6F04A FIELD
TB-AI-1 6F04+ DV6F04 + FIELD
DV6F00 - TB-AI-1 6F00A FIELD
TB-AI-1 6F00+ DV6F00 + FIELD
CR6E15 14 DV6E15 + FIELD
CR6E15 13 DV6E15 - FIELD
CR6E14 14 DV6E14 + FIELD
CR6E14 13 DV6E14 - FIELD
CR6E13 14 DV6E13 + FIELD
CR6E13 13 DV6E13 - FIELD
CR6E12 14 DV6E12 + FIELD
CR6E12 13 DV6E12 - FIELD
CR6E11 14 DV6E11 + FIELD
CR6E11 13 DV6E11 - FIELD
CR6E10 14 DV6E10 + FIELD
CR6E10 13 DV6E10 - FIELD
CR6E09 14 DV6E09 + FIELD
CR6E09 13 DV6E09 - FIELD
CR6E08 14 DV6E08 + FIELD
CR6E08 13 DV6E08 - FIELD
DV6E07 - TB-DO-1 6E07B FIELD
TB-DO-1 6E07A DV6E07 + FIELD
DV6E06 - TB-DO-1 6E06B FIELD
TB-DO-1 6E06A DV6E06 + FIELD
DV6E05 - TB-DO-1 6E05B FIELD
TB-DO-1 6E05A DV6E05 + FIELD
DV6E04 - TB-DO-1 6E04B FIELD
TB-DO-1 6E04A DV6E04 + FIELD
DV6E03 - TB-DO-1 6E03B FIELD
TB-DO-1 6E03A DV6E03 + FIELD
DV6E02 - TB-DO-1 6E02B FIELD
TB-DO-1 6E02A DV6E02 + FIELD
DV6E01 - TB-DO-1 6E01B FIELD
TB-DO-1 6E01A DV6E01 + FIELD
DV6E00 - TB-DO-1 6E00B FIELD
TB-DO-1 6E00A DV6E00 + FIELD
DV6D09 - TB-DI-1 6D09B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D09A DV6D09 + FIELD
DV6D08 - TB-DI-1 6D08B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D08A DV6D08 + FIELD
DV6D07 - TB-DI-1 6D07B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D07A DV6D07 + FIELD
DV6D06 - TB-DI-1 6D06B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D06A DV6D06 + FIELD
DV6D05 - TB-DI-1 6D05B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D05A DV6D05 + FIELD
DV6D04 - TB-DI-1 6D04B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D04A DV6D04 + FIELD
WIRENO COMPONENT 1 PIN 1 COMPONENT 2 PIN2 WIRE TYPE
DV6D03 - TB-DI-1 6D03B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D03A DV6D03 + FIELD
DV6D02 - TB-DI-1 6D02B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D02A DV6D02 + FIELD
DV6D01 - TB-DI-1 6D01B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D01A DV6D01 + FIELD
DV6D00 - TB-DI-1 6D00B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6D00A DV6D00 + FIELD
DV6C15 - TB-DI-1 6C15B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C15A DV6C15 + FIELD
DV6C14 - TB-DI-1 6C14B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C14A DV6C14 + FIELD
DV6C13 - TB-DI-1 6C13B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C13A DV6C13 + FIELD
DV6C12 - TB-DI-1 6C12B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C12A DV6C12 + FIELD
DV6C11 - TB-DI-1 6C11B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C11A DV6C11 + FIELD
DV6C10 - TB-DI-1 6C10B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C10A DV6C10 + FIELD
DV6C09 - TB-DI-1 6C09B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C09A DV6C09 + FIELD
DV6C08 - TB-DI-1 6C08B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C08A DV6C08 + FIELD
DV6C07 - TB-DI-1 6C07B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C07A DV6C07 + FIELD
DV6C06 - TB-DI-1 6C06B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C06A DV6C06 + FIELD
DV6C05 - TB-DI-1 6C05B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C05A DV6C05 + FIELD
DV6C04 - TB-DI-1 6C04B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C04A DV6C04 + FIELD
DV6C03 - TB-DI-1 6C03B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C03A DV6C03 + FIELD
DV6C02 - TB-DI-1 6C02B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C02A DV6C02 + FIELD
DV6C01 - TB-DI-1 6C01B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C01A DV6C01 + FIELD
DV6C00 - TB-DI-1 6C00B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6C00A DV6C00 + FIELD
DV6B15 - TB-DI-1 6B15B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B15A DV6B15 + FIELD
DV6B14 - TB-DI-1 6B14B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B14A DV6B14 + FIELD
DV6B13 - TB-DI-1 6B13B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B13A DV6B13 + FIELD
DV6B12 - TB-DI-1 6B12B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B12A DV6B12 + FIELD
DV6B11 - TB-DI-1 6B11B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B11A DV6B11 + FIELD
DV6B10 - TB-DI-1 6B10B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B10A DV6B10 + FIELD
DV6B09 - TB-DI-1 6B09B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B09A DV6B09 + FIELD
DV6B08 - TB-DI-1 6B08B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B08A DV6B08 + FIELD
DV6B07 - TB-DI-1 6B07B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B07A DV6B07 + FIELD
DV6B06 - TB-DI-1 6B06B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B06A DV6B06 + FIELD
WIRENO COMPONENT 1 PIN 1 COMPONENT 2 PIN2 WIRE TYPE
DV6B05 - TB-DI-1 6B05B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B05A DV6B05 + FIELD
DV6B04 - TB-DI-1 6B04B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B04A DV6B04 + FIELD
DV6B03 - TB-DI-1 6B03B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B03A DV6B03 + FIELD
DV6B02 - TB-DI-1 6B02B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B02A DV6B02 + FIELD
DV6B01 - TB-DI-1 6B01B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B01A DV6B01 + FIELD
DV6B00 - TB-DI-1 6B00B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6B00A DV6B00 + FIELD
DV6A15 - TB-DI-1 6A15B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A15A DV6A15 + FIELD
DV6A14 - TB-DI-1 6A14B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A14A DV6A14 + FIELD
DV6A13 - TB-DI-1 6A13B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A13A DV6A13 + FIELD
DV6A12 - TB-DI-1 6A12B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A12A DV6A12 + FIELD
DV6A11 - TB-DI-1 6A11B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A11A DV6A11 + FIELD
DV6A10 - TB-DI-1 6A10B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A10A DV6A10 + FIELD
DV6A09 - TB-DI-1 6A09B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A09A DV6A09 + FIELD
DV6A08 - TB-DI-1 6A08B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A08A DV6A08 + FIELD
DV6A07 - TB-DI-1 6A07B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A07A DV6A07 + FIELD
DV6A06 - TB-DI-1 6A06B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A06A DV6A06 + FIELD
DV6A05 - TB-DI-1 6A05B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A05A DV6A05 + FIELD
DV6A04 - TB-DI-1 6A04B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A04A DV6A04 + FIELD
DV6A03 - TB-DI-1 6A03B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A03A DV6A03 + FIELD
DV6A02 - TB-DI-1 6A02B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A02A DV6A02 + FIELD
DV6A01 - TB-DI-1 6A01B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A01A DV6A01 + FIELD
DV6A00 - TB-DI-1 6A00B FIELD
TB-DI-1 6A00A DV6A00 + FIELD
TB-AI-1 GND GND3A02 GREEN_14
RECP3A01 GND RACK1S00 G GREEN_14
FAN01 G RECP3A01 GND GREEN_14
LSA3A01 G GND3A01 GREEN_14
GND3A01 GND3A02 GREEN_14
GND3A02 ROUTER G GREEN_14
ROUTER G PSU4A01 GND GREEN_14
PSU4A01 GND FAN01 G GREEN_14
GND3A01 LSA3A01 G GREEN_14
GND3A01 FIELD
LSA3A01 N FIELD
LSA3A01 L FIELD
ROUTER 1 OIT01 ORANGE_CAT6
RACK1S00 - ROUTER 3 ORANGE_CAT6
3A00A CB3A00 CB3A01 RED_12
3A00L LSA3A01 L CB3A00 ORANGE_12
WIRENO COMPONENT 1 PIN 1 COMPONENT 2 PIN2 WIRE TYPE
3A00N LSA3A01 N TB-AC-1 3A01N WHITE_12
3A01A CB3A01 CR3A00 A1 RED_14
3A01B TB-AC-1 3A01N CR3A00 A2 WHITE_14
3A01L CB3A01 PSU4A01 L RED_14
3A01N TB-AC-1 3A01N PSU4A01 L2/N WHITE_14
3A02L CB3A02 RECP3A01 RED_14
3A02N RECP3A01 TB-AC-1 3A02N WHITE_14
3A03B TSTAT3A01 2 FAN01 L1 RED_14
3A03L CB3A03 TSTAT3A01 1 RED_14
3A03N FAN01 N TB-AC-1 3A03N WHITE_14
3A04L CB3A04 PD6E00 3 RED_14
3A04N TB-AC-1 3A04N PD6E00 4 WHITE_14
4A00+ PSU4A01 + UPS4A01 + BLUE_10
4A00- PSU4A01 - UPS4A01 - WHT_BLU_10
4A01+ UPS4A01 + CB4A10 BLUE_10
4A01- UPS4A01 - TB-DC-1 4A10- WHT_BLU_10
4A02+ CB4A50 UPS4A01 + BLUE_10
4A02- TB-BATT-1 4A03 UPS4A01 - WHT_BLU_10
4A03+ BAT4A03 + CB4A50 BLUE_10
4A03- TB-BATT-1 4A01 BAT4A03 - WHT_BLU_10
4A04+ TB-BATT-1 4A02 BAT4A03 + BLUE_10
4A04- BAT4A03 - TB-BATT-1 4A03 WHT_BLU_10
4A05A UPS4A02 11 UPS4A01 11 BLUE_16
4A05B UPS4A02 12 UPS4A01 12 BLUE_16
4A05C UPS4A02 13 UPS4A01 13 BLUE_16
4A05D TB-BATT-1 4A02 UPS4A02 E1 BLUE_18
4A06A UPS4A01 3 TB-DI-1 6D12A BLUE_18
4A06B UPS4A01 4 TB-DI-1 6D12B BLUE_18
4A07A UPS4A01 5 TB-DI-1 6D13A BLUE_18
4A07B UPS4A01 6 TB-DI-1 6D13B BLUE_18
4A10+ CB4A10 TB-DI-1 6A00A BLUE_16
4A11+ CB4A11 TB-DI-1 6B00A BLUE_16
4A12+ CB4A12 TB-DI-1 6C00A BLUE_16
4A13+ CB4A13 TB-DI-1 6D00A BLUE_16
4A14+ CB4A14 TB-DO-1 6EV1+ BLUE_16
4A14- TB-DC-1 4A14- TB-DO-1 6E00B WHT_BLU_16
4A15+ CB4A15 TB-AI-1 6F00+ BLUE_16
4A15- TB-DC-1 4A15- TB-AI-1 6F00- WHT_BLU_16
4A16+ CB4A16 RACK1S00 + BLUE_16
4A16- RACK1S00 - TB-DC-1 4A16- WHT_BLU_16
4A17+ CB4A17 RACK1S00 + BLUE_16
4A17- RACK1S00 - TB-DC-1 4A17- WHT_BLU_16
4A19+ CB4A19 ROUTER V BLUE_16
4A19- ROUTER RT TB-DC-1 4A19- WHT_BLU_16
4A20+ CB4A20 OIT01 12 BLUE_16
4A20- OIT01 11 TB-DC-1 4A20- WHT_BLU_16
4A21+ CB4A21 TB-DC-1 4A30+ BLUE_16
4A30+ TB-DC-1 4A30+ CB3A00 41 BLUE_16
4A30- TB-DC-1 4A30- UPS4A01 - WHT_BLU_16
4A30A CB3A00 42 CB3A00 11 BLUE_16
4A30B CB3A00 12 UPS4A01 + BLUE_16
4A33+ TB-DC-1 4A33+ TB-DOOR 5A01 BLUE_16
4A33- TB-DC-1 4A33- TB-DOOR 5A05 WHT_BLU_16
5A01 TB-DOOR 5A01 SW5A01 BLUE_16
5A01A SW5A01 TB-DOOR 5A02 BLUE_16
5A02 TB-DOOR 5A02 LT5A01 1 BLUE_16
5A03 TB-DOOR 5A03 SW5A01 BLUE_18
5A03A SW5A01 TB-DOOR 5A04 BLUE_18
5A04 TB-DOOR 5A04 TB-DI-1 6D15B BLUE_18
5A05 LT5A01 2 TB-DOOR 5A05 WHT_BLU_16

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE99B.1
WIRENO COMPONENT 1 PIN 1 COMPONENT 2 PIN2 WIRE TYPE
5A08 TB-DOOR 5A03 TB-DI-1 6D15A BLUE_18
6A00 TB-DI-1 6A00B RACK1S01 0 BLUE_18
6A01 TB-DI-1 6A01B RACK1S01 1 BLUE_18
6A02 TB-DI-1 6A02B RACK1S01 2 BLUE_18
6A03 TB-DI-1 6A03B RACK1S01 3 BLUE_18
6A04 TB-DI-1 6A04B RACK1S01 4 BLUE_18
6A05 TB-DI-1 6A05B RACK1S01 5 BLUE_18
6A06 TB-DI-1 6A06B RACK1S01 6 BLUE_18
6A07 TB-DI-1 6A07B RACK1S01 7 BLUE_18
6A08 TB-DI-1 6A08B RACK1S01 8 BLUE_18
6A09 TB-DI-1 6A09B RACK1S01 9 BLUE_18
6A10 TB-DI-1 6A10B RACK1S01 10 BLUE_18
6A11 TB-DI-1 6A11B RACK1S01 11 BLUE_18
6A12 TB-DI-1 6A12B RACK1S01 12 BLUE_18
6A13 TB-DI-1 6A13B RACK1S01 13 BLUE_18
6A14 TB-DI-1 6A14B RACK1S01 14 BLUE_18
6A15 TB-DI-1 6A15B RACK1S01 15 BLUE_18
6B00 TB-DI-1 6B00B RACK1S02 0 BLUE_18
6B01 TB-DI-1 6B01B RACK1S02 1 BLUE_18
6B02 TB-DI-1 6B02B RACK1S02 2 BLUE_18
6B03 TB-DI-1 6B03B RACK1S02 3 BLUE_18
6B04 TB-DI-1 6B04B RACK1S02 4 BLUE_18
6B05 TB-DI-1 6B05B RACK1S02 5 BLUE_18
6B06 TB-DI-1 6B06B RACK1S02 6 BLUE_18
6B07 TB-DI-1 6B07B RACK1S02 7 BLUE_18
6B08 TB-DI-1 6B08B RACK1S02 8 BLUE_18
6B09 TB-DI-1 6B09B RACK1S02 9 BLUE_18
6B10 TB-DI-1 6B10B RACK1S02 10 BLUE_18
6B11 TB-DI-1 6B11B RACK1S02 11 BLUE_18
6B12 TB-DI-1 6B12B RACK1S02 12 BLUE_18
6B13 TB-DI-1 6B13B RACK1S02 13 BLUE_18
6B14 TB-DI-1 6B14B RACK1S02 14 BLUE_18
6B15 TB-DI-1 6B15B RACK1S02 15 BLUE_18
6C00 TB-DI-1 6C00B RACK1S03 0 BLUE_18
6C01 TB-DI-1 6C01B RACK1S03 1 BLUE_18
6C02 TB-DI-1 6C02B RACK1S03 2 BLUE_18
6C03 TB-DI-1 6C03B RACK1S03 3 BLUE_18
6C04 TB-DI-1 6C04B RACK1S03 4 BLUE_18
6C05 TB-DI-1 6C05B RACK1S03 5 BLUE_18
6C06 TB-DI-1 6C06B RACK1S03 6 BLUE_18
6C07 TB-DI-1 6C07B RACK1S03 7 BLUE_18
6C08 TB-DI-1 6C08B RACK1S03 8 BLUE_18
6C09 TB-DI-1 6C09B RACK1S03 9 BLUE_18
6C10 TB-DI-1 6C10B RACK1S03 10 BLUE_18
6C11 TB-DI-1 6C11B RACK1S03 11 BLUE_18
6C12 TB-DI-1 6C12B RACK1S03 12 BLUE_18
6C13 TB-DI-1 6C13B RACK1S03 13 BLUE_18
6C14 TB-DI-1 6C14B RACK1S03 14 BLUE_18
6C15 TB-DI-1 6C15B RACK1S03 15 BLUE_18
6D00 TB-DI-1 6D00B RACK1S04 0 BLUE_18
6D01 TB-DI-1 6D01B RACK1S04 1 BLUE_18
6D02 TB-DI-1 6D02B RACK1S04 2 BLUE_18
6D03 TB-DI-1 6D03B RACK1S04 3 BLUE_18
6D04 TB-DI-1 6D04B RACK1S04 4 BLUE_18
6D05 TB-DI-1 6D05B RACK1S04 5 BLUE_18
6D06 TB-DI-1 6D06B RACK1S04 6 BLUE_18
6D07 TB-DI-1 6D07B RACK1S04 7 BLUE_18
6D08 TB-DI-1 6D08B RACK1S04 8 BLUE_18
6D09 TB-DI-1 6D09B RACK1S04 9 BLUE_18
6D10 TB-DI-1 6D10B RACK1S04 10 BLUE_18
WIRENO COMPONENT 1 PIN 1 COMPONENT 2 PIN2 WIRE TYPE
6D10A TB-DI-1 6D10A TSTAT6D01 1 BLUE_18
6D10B TSTAT6D01 2 TB-DI-1 6D10B BLUE_18
6D11 TB-DI-1 6D11B RACK1S04 11 BLUE_18
6D11A TB-DI-1 6D11A CR3A00 13 BLUE_18
6D11B CR3A00 14 TB-DI-1 6D11B BLUE_18
6D12 TB-DI-1 6D12B RACK1S04 12 BLUE_18
6D13 TB-DI-1 6D13B RACK1S04 13 BLUE_18
6D14 TB-DI-1 6D14B RACK1S04 14 BLUE_18
6D15 TB-DI-1 6D15B RACK1S04 15 BLUE_18
6E00 RACK1S05 0 TB-DO-1 6E00A YELLOW_18
6E01 RACK1S05 1 TB-DO-1 6E01A YELLOW_18
6E02 RACK1S05 2 TB-DO-1 6E02A YELLOW_18
6E03 RACK1S05 3 TB-DO-1 6E03A YELLOW_18
6E04 RACK1S05 4 TB-DO-1 6E04A YELLOW_18
6E05 RACK1S05 5 TB-DO-1 6E05A YELLOW_18
6E06 RACK1S05 6 TB-DO-1 6E06A YELLOW_18
6E07 RACK1S05 7 TB-DO-1 6E07A YELLOW_18
6E08 RACK1S05 8 TB-DO-1 6E08A YELLOW_18
6E08A TB-DO-1 6E08A CR6E08 A1 YELLOW_18
6E08B CR6E08 A2 TB-DO-1 6E08B WHT_BLU_16
6E09 RACK1S05 9 TB-DO-1 6E09A YELLOW_18
6E09A TB-DO-1 6E09A CR6E09 A1 YELLOW_18
6E10 RACK1S05 10 TB-DO-1 6E10A YELLOW_18
6E10A TB-DO-1 6E10A CR6E10 A1 YELLOW_18
6E11 RACK1S05 11 TB-DO-1 6E11A YELLOW_18
6E11A TB-DO-1 6E11A CR6E11 A1 YELLOW_18
6E12 RACK1S05 12 TB-DO-1 6E12A YELLOW_18
6E12A TB-DO-1 6E12A CR6E12 A1 YELLOW_18
6E13 RACK1S05 13 TB-DO-1 6E13A YELLOW_18
6E13A TB-DO-1 6E13A CR6E13 A1 YELLOW_18
6E14 RACK1S05 14 TB-DO-1 6E14A YELLOW_18
6E14A TB-DO-1 6E14A CR6E14 A1 YELLOW_18
6E15 RACK1S05 15 TB-DO-1 6E15A YELLOW_18
6E15A TB-DO-1 6E15A CR6E15 A1 YELLOW_18
6EV1+ TB-DO-1 6EV1+ RACK1S05 16 BLUE_16
6EV1- RACK1S05 17 TB-DO-1 6EV1- WHT_BLU_16
6F00A TB-AI-1 6F00A RACK1S06 0 PURPLE_18
6F00B TB-AI-1 6F00B RACK1S06 1 PURPLE_18
6F01A TB-AI-1 6F01A RACK1S06 2 PURPLE_18
6F01B TB-AI-1 6F01B RACK1S06 3 PURPLE_18
6F02A TB-AI-1 6F02A RACK1S06 4 PURPLE_18
6F02B TB-AI-1 6F02B RACK1S06 5 PURPLE_18
6F03A TB-AI-1 6F03A RACK1S06 6 PURPLE_18
6F03B TB-AI-1 6F03B RACK1S06 7 PURPLE_18
6F04A TB-AI-1 6F04A RACK1S06 8 PURPLE_18
6F04B TB-AI-1 6F04B RACK1S06 9 PURPLE_18
6F05A TB-AI-1 6F05A RACK1S06 10 PURPLE_18
6F05B TB-AI-1 6F05B RACK1S06 11 PURPLE_18
6F06A TB-AI-1 6F06A RACK1S06 12 PURPLE_18
6F06B TB-AI-1 6F06B RACK1S06 13 PURPLE_18
6F07A TB-AI-1 6F07A RACK1S06 14 PURPLE_18
6F07B TB-AI-1 6F07B RACK1S06 15 PURPLE_18

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
"AS BUILT"

A B C D E F G H
1 2
3 4
5 6
CUSTOMER INFO:

DWG S
CALEDRAFT DATE:

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 2026 NO SCALE99B.2

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-1

SECTION 40 61 21
PRO

CESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION
A. This section specifies testing requirements for Division 40 Process Interconnections Scop
e of
this section shall apply to work shown within contract documents. As part of this work, this includes but, is not limited to the following:

1. Factory, site, and reliability testing of control panels.

2. Site and reliability testing of field wiring and instrumenta t ion.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 40 67 00 – C ont rol System Panels and Racks

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Commissioning Plan

1. Include all necessary testing steps and information to complete the site acceptance t
esting and reliability acceptance testing procedures described herein.

2. Include all necessary steps to complete the cutover from the existing process control
system to the new process control system, including but not limited to wire identification, control panel installation, wiring, wire terminations, and tagging in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Organize and assemble test procedures for each analog and discrete loop in the p
rocess control system. Organize by I/O point.

4. Include a detailed, step-by-step description of the required test procedure, panel,
and terminal block numbers for points of measurement, input test values, expected resultant values, test equipment required, process setup requirements, process testing, and safety precautions.

5. Include test report forms for each loop, including forms for wiring, and i ndividual
component tests, with the test procedure documentation. a. Record the actual test results on these forms and assemble them into final
test reports.

6. Include tests to be completed and documented by other parties.

7. Preprint and populate information in the test report forms to the extent possible prior to commencing testing.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-2

8. Include on the test report forms:
a.

Project name.
b. Process area associated with the equipment under test. c. Instrument loop description.
d. Instrument loop identification number.
e. Instrument nameplate data.
f. Time and date of test.
g. Inspection checklist and results.
h. Reference to applicable test procedure.
i. Expected and actual test results for each test point in the loop including progra
mmable controller data table or register values.
j. Test equipment used.
k. Space for remarks regarding test procedure or results, observations, etc.

l. Name, date, and signature of testing personnel.
m. Test wit ne ss’s name and signature.

B. Closeout Submittals

1. Submit final test records in electronic form by scanning and converting t he records and files to PDF format, to preserve actual signatures and signoffs.

2. Unwitnessed Factory Testing Results
a. Submit completed factory testing documentation following completion of the un
witnessed factory test for each panel.

3. Witnessed Factory Testing Results
a. Submit completed factory testing documentation following completion of the w
itnessed factory test for each panel.

4. Commissioning Plan Results
a. Submit completed site testing documentation following c ompletion of the site test for each panel and all field wiring.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. In accordance with Section 40 61 13.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-3

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Utilize a record-keeping system to document progress and completion for each tas k in the test procedures.

B. Always keep documentation current and available for inspection on site in a location designated
by the Construction Manager:

1. List of names of Contractor’s, Engineer’s, and Owner’s personnel associated wit
h final construction and testing, and normal and emergency contact telephone numbers.

2. Testing status spreadsheet with breakdown for each process area and process system,
with percentage complete on each testing sequence task.

3. Testing status specific to pre-loop test and loop testing status spreadsheet to include
the I/O list organized by area, system, and loop number. Percent complete of the process control system will be based on percentage of I/O points tested.

C. The Contractor shall produce a testing schedule setting forth the sequence expected for pe
rforming the test work.

1. The schedule shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1.

2. The schedule shall show the expected start date, duration of the test and expected completio
n date of each test.

3. The test schedule shall be submitted no later than four (4) weeks in ad vance of the date testing is to begin. The Construction Manager will not witness any testing work for the purpose of acceptance until the Contractor has submitted a schedule to which the Construction Manager takes no exception.

4. The test schedule shall be updated weekly, showing actual dates of test work, indicatin
g systems and equipment testing completed satisfactorily and meeting the requirements of this project manual.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL
A. General Requirements

1. Provide the labor, tools, material, power, and services necessary to provide the process i
nstrumentation and control system inspection and testing specified herein.

2. Inspect materials, equipment, and construction included under this specification in
accordance with this section and subsequent sections of this division.

Perform testing in accordance with this and subsequent sections of this division.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-4

B. Test Equipment and Materials

1. Provide test equipment to conduct the specified tests that simulate inputs and read
outputs with a rated accuracy at the point of measurement at least three (3) times greater than the component under test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Performance Deviation Tolerances

1. Tolerances are specified in individual sections. Where tolerances are not specifi
ed, refer to the manufacturer’s published performance specifications.

B. Witnessing

1. The Engineer/Owner reserves the right to observe all testing described here i n.

2. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Owner at least four (4) weeks in advance pr
ior of any scheduled testing and include:
a. Schedule for the testing
b. Location of the testing
c. Testing equipment used
d. Detailed test procedure with forms for the recording of test results e. S
ign-off spaces for the individuals performing and witnessing the tests

3.2 T

ESTING SEQUENCE
A. The testing sequence shall be performed for each control panel.

B.

Perform tests for each control panel and solar control panel in the follow ing sequence:

1. Factory Acceptance Testing

2. Site Acceptance Testing
a. Pre-commissioning electrical testing
b. Loop testing
c. Functional testing

3. Reliability Acceptance Testing

3.3 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING (FAT)
A. An unwitnessed FAT test shall be performed with signed certification and test results prior
to the witnessed FAT test.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-5

B. Commence witnessed Factory Acceptance Testing after the unwitnessed Factory Accep
tan
ce Testing has been completed and documented to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Owner and/or Construction Manager.

C. Unwitnessed FAT test and witnessed FAT test shall be performed and documen t ed using test documentation provided by the Engineer in Appendix A.

D. Provide all expenses for one Owner staff member and one Engineer staff member to w
itness factory testing if factory is located more than 60 miles from Project site. Travel shall be during business hours on weekdays.

E. Factory acceptance testing requirements shall be as follows:

1. Load software and configuration for control system panels, controllers, and network
components at the control system equipment supplier’s factory prior to the FAT.
a. PLC programs specifically designed for FAT shall be created by the Contr
actor that allow for simple forcing of outputs and monitoring of all inputs.

2. Inspect equipment, panel instruments, panels, and cabinets.

3. Verify all equipment, panel instruments, panels, and cabinets have been assembled
per the Contract Documents.

4. Verify all wiring has been installed per the Contract Documents. Wiring verification
includes:
a. Verify that electrical power and signal cable ring-out and resistance testing ha
s been performed. Conduct wiring tests after cables have been properly terminated, tagged, and inspected.
b. Compare cable data with drawings and specifications. c. Inspect exposed sections of cable for physical damage and correct connecti
on in accordance with the single-line diagram.
d. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wr
ench method in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
e. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and inde
ntation.
f. Inspect for correct identification and arrangements. g. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and
adjacent conductors.
h. Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-6

5. Validate each input loop and output loop by simulated signals for analog i n puts and by shorting discrete inputs. Validation includes:
a. Observation of online controller programming application software with the asso
ciated outputs state change.
b. Calibration and operation of instruments on or in the control panels.

6. R
epair and correct any non-conformances identified during Factory Acceptance Tes
ting.

7. Retest any changes or corrections to the panel identified during Factory Acceptan
ce Testing at no additional cost.

3.4 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING (SAT)
A. Commence Site Acceptance Testing after the Factory Acceptance Testing and instal
latio
n phase of the approved Commissioning Plan has been completed and documented to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Owner and/or Construction Manager.

B. Pre-Commissioning Electrical Testing

1. Wiring Tests
a. Verify that electrical power and signal cable ring-out and resistance testing ha
s been performed. Conduct wiring tests after cables have been properly terminated, tagged, and inspected.
b. Compare cable data with drawings and specifications. c. Inspect exposed sections of cable for physical damage and correct connecti
on in accordance with the single-line diagram.
d. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wr
ench method in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
e. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and inde
ntation.
f. Inspect for correct identification and arrangements. g. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and
adjacent conductors.
h. Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection.

2. Instrument and Component Inspection
a. Compare and validate instrument type and nameplate data with the drawings,
specifications, and data sheet.
b. Validate instrument identification tag.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-1

c. Confirm that instrument installation conforms to drawings, speci
fi
cations, and manufacturer’s instructions.
d. Verify proper conductor termination and tagging.
e. Visually check for physical damage, dirt accumulation, and corrosion. f. Verify that isolation amplifiers, surge protection, and safety barriers are properly ins
talled.
g. Report deficiencies identified within 24 hours of discovery. No instrument
or system component shall be tested until deficiencies are addressed.

3. Pre-Loop Testing
a. Test every I/O point from the field device to the termination on the I / O card in the panel.
b. Perform tests with loop wiring complete and terminated for each point being
tested between initial field device and I/O termination point. c. For each discrete I/O point, verify and document contact status value for both t
he opened and closed positions of the contact.
d. For analog points, verify analog value matches local display. Confirm calibrati
on at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of value.

4. Repair and correct any non-conformances identified during Pre-Commissioning El
ectrical Testing.

C. Loop Testing

1. Provide a request to perform loop testing at least two (2) weeks prior to t he requested loop test date. Include the following with the request:
a. Written certification that pre-commissioning electrical testing has been completed for
all new wiring installed, documented, and passed for the control panel or solar control panel for which loop testing is being requested.
b. Submittal numbers that define the tests and data points for the I/O to be tested. Provide updates to the I/O list or instrument calibration as an outcome of the pre-commissioning electrical testing.
c. Loop testing shall be coordinated and performed with the Owner or Owner
Representative as directed by Owner.

2. Commence loop testing after the pre-commissioning electrical testing has been completed
and documented to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Owner and/or Construction Manager.

3. Test each instrument loop as an integrated system. Check operation from f i eld instruments to transmitter to receiving components. Inject test signals at the

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-2

process impulse line connection where the measuring technique permits, and otherwi
se at the most primary signal access point.

4. For each discrete I/O point, verify and document field contact status value for both
the opened and closed position of the contact.

5. For analog points, verify that analog value matches local display. Confirm calibrati
on at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of value.

6. If the output control or monitoring device fails to indicate properly, make correct
ions to the loop circuitry or device. Repeat the test until devices and instruments operate as required.

7. Correct loop circuitry and repeat the test until the instruments operate pr operly.

D. Functional Testing

1. Functional testing shall be coordinated and performed with the Owne r ’s SI.

2. Commence functional testing after the loop testing has been completed and documented
to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Owner and/or Construction Manager.

3. Functional testing, performed by the Owner’s SI and supported by the Cont
ractor, consists of installing and debugging the PLC control logic program, installing and debugging the local HMI program, verifying the interface points between the controller I/O cards and field devices and equipment, exercising the control strategies, and verifying communication with the SCADA system.

3.5 RELIABILITY ACCEPTANCE TESTING (RAT)
A. Commence reliability acceptance testing after the site acceptance testing has been completed
and documented to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Owner and/or Construction Manager.

B. Perform the test of the completed system in full operation and demonstrate that functi
onal requirements of this specification have been met. Demonstrate the following over a 30-day period:

1. Each component of the system operates correctly with other components of the sys
tem.

2. Analog control loops operate in a stable manner.

3. Hard-wired and software equipment interlocks perform correctly.

4. Process control sequences perform correctly.

5. Application program performs monitoring and control functions correctly.

6. O
perator interface graphics represent the monitoring and control functions corr
ectly.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21-3

C. Perform a 14-day Test:

1. During the 30-day RAT period, a 14-day continuous run of the system shall be pe
rformed. The test shall be passed if no system function is lost, no hardware or software failure occurs.

2. No software "patches" or changes will be allowed to bypass failed modules during
this test. Any software and/or hardware correction made to the system shall result in the mandatory rerun of the entire 112-hour test.

3.6 NON-CONFORMANCES
A. As non-conformances are discovered during any phase of testing, responsibility for reso
lvi
ng issues in a timely manner is described below:

1. Owner
a. Networking, Cellular, and Site to Site Communication issues

2. System Integrator (Ow ne r’s Representative)
a. PLC Programming, SCADA Integration, and local HMI Programming issu
es

3. Contractor
a. Circuit Integrity, Power, Hardware and associated hardwired conn
ections.
b. Provide qualified personnel to correct deficiencies in the work that may be en
countered during control strategy testing. Deficiencies shall be corrected within 24 hours of written notification. Failure of the Contractor to provide such personnel shall be considered a delay and subject to liquidated damages under the terms of the contract.

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING
40 61 21-4

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21A-1

SECTION 40 61 21A
PRO

CESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING APPENDIX A

Testers:

Start Date:

Completion Date:

Panel Name:

Item Task Initial Date
1 General Instructions

1.1 The testing engineers are responsible for legibly recording their names, date, items checked, and non-conformances on all applicable documentation including: ITC (this document), I/O list, panel schematics, and non-conformance forms. All changes to the design made during construction and testing are to be redlined on the as- built panel schematics.

Note: All testing procedures that do not apply to the panel being tested are to be marked as N/A.

1.2 The testing engineers agree on pen and highlighting color standards for testing notes, drawing corrections, items verified correct, and non- conformances. Document standards used as a legend in space below:

Verified Correct: Correct Non-Conformance: _NC 3_
Redline: Redline Corrected Non-Conformance: _NC 3_
Notes: Note

2 Initial Safety Preparations

2.1 Verify that the panel assembly is safe to perform the following testing procedures. Make sure all the following safety precautions have been completed before continuing

2.2 Verify the panel assembly is secured so it won’t fall or tip over during testing

2.3 Verify the that all external sources of power coming into the enclosure are turned off at the source

2.4 Verify there is no voltage present on the wires of the incoming power wires, terminals, and the line side of the circuit breakers

3 Panel Components and Mounting

3.1 Verify the panel assembly matches the design. Verify each item listed below matches the panel schematics. Highlight each item on the schematics after it is checked

3.2 Panel exterior layout matches the design (refer to panel exterior layout and dimension sheets)

3.3 Verify all enclosure mechanical components operate correctly (laptop shelf, door latches, door stops, door closed switches, disconnect handles, etc.)

3.4 Panel interior layout matches the design (refer to panel interior layout and dimension sheets)

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21A-2

3.5 Spacing requirements of components match the design and are easily accessed for panel installation and maintenance (refer to panel layout and dimension sheets)

Item Task Initial Date

3.6 The heat vents and heat dissipation areas of all applicable components are not obstructed (check for devices, wires, and shipping stickers on components)

3.7 Each component matches with the bill of materials (refer to panel schematics BOM and panel layout sheets)

3.8 Each component is mounted securely and properly (confirm by physically shaking each component)

3.9 Each control panel label is clear and correct (refer to panel schematics)

3.10 Verify all items listed in the panel construction comments have been completed (refer to panel schematics)

4 Panel Wiring

4.1 Verify each wire in the panel matches the design. On each sheet of the panel schematics check each item listed below. Highlight each item on the schematics after it is checked

4.2 Each fuse is the correct type and rating (refer to panel schematics)

4.3 Verify each fuse is not damaged or blown (verify continuity)

4.4 Wire sizes and colors are correct (refer to panel schematics)

4.5 Wire number labels are clear, correct, and facing forward so they are easy to read (refer to panel schematics)

4.6 Terminal number labels are clear, correct, and easy to read (refer to panel schematics)

4.7 Labeled wires are connected to the correct component terminals (refer to panel schematics)

4.8 Labeled wires are connected to the correct terminal blocks (refer to panel schematics)

4.9 Wires have passed a "tug test" to confirm proper termination

4.10 There are no loose wire strands or fraying at termination points

4.11 At the non-connected end of shielded wires, all shields are cut-off and properly insulated

4.12 DIP switches, rotary switches, and jumpers for PLC modules and other components are set correctly (refer to panel schematics)

5 Power Distribution and Initial Power Up Sequence

5.1 The following sequence is used to initially apply power to the panel and verify the power distribution circuits are operating correctly.

Perform each step in the order listed. Do not proceed to the next step until the previous step has been completed successfully

5.2 Verify there is no voltage present on the wires of the incoming power wires, terminals, and the line side of the circuit breakers

5.3 Verify there is continuity between the enclosure and the back panel ground bar.

Note: A toothed lock washer (provided by the enclosure manufacture) is to be installed under one of panel mounting nuts to make the connection between the back panel and the enclosure. If there is no continuity, then this washer is most likely missing.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21A-3

5.4 Verify there is continuity between each enclosure door and the back panel ground bar

Item Task Initial Date

5.5 Action: For each DIN rail that is mounted on insulated standoffs, remove the DIN railing grounding terminal or wire
 Verify there is no continuity between the DIN rail and the back panel ground bar.

Action: Following the test, reconnect the grounding terminal or wire

5.6 For each DIN rail mounted ground terminal block, verify there is continuity between the ground terminal and the back panel ground bar

5.7 Action: Turn on all AC circuit breakers, close all AC fused disconnect terminal blocks, and close all DC fused disconnect terminal blocks (if applicable) that serve auxiliary DC loads, and pull out the Emergency- Stop pushbutton (if present)

5.8 There is no direct connection between each AC phase and ground. (Verify no continuity or Resistance > 0 Ohms. If multiple AC sources exist check each one separately)

5.9 There is no direct connection between each AC phase and neutral. (Verify no continuity or Resistance > 0 Ohms. If multiple AC sources exist check each one separately)

5.10 There is no direct connection between DC positive and ground. (Verify no continuity or Resistance > 0 Ohms. If multiple DC sources exist check each one separately)

5.11 There is no direct connection between DC positive and common. (Verify no continuity or Resistance > 0 Ohms. If multiple DC sources exist check each one separately)

5.12 Action: Turn off all AC circuit breakers, open all AC fused disconnect terminal blocks, and open all DC fused disconnect terminal blocks (if applicable) that serve auxiliary DC loads (not fuses associated with I/O loops), and push in Emergency-Stop pushbutton (if present)

5.13 Verify the earth ground wire of AC control power source is connected to the ground bar within the panel

5.14 Action: Connect and power-up AC control power source  Verify there is the correct AC voltage (measured from line-to- neutral) on the line and load sides of input transient voltage surge protector (if present) and line side of AC main circuit breaker.

5.15 Action: Close AC main circuit breaker, AC main fuse, and/or AC main disconnect
 Verify that the correct AC voltage is present on the AC terminal blocks and on the line side of all AC secondary circuit breakers

5.16 Verify the AC main circuit breaker de-energizes and energizes all AC power circuits in the panel

5.17 Action: Close each AC secondary circuit breaker or fused disconnect one at a time
 Verify that the correct AC voltage is present at each of the devices served by these circuit breakers

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21A-4

5.18 Verify each AC secondary circuit breaker de-energizes and energizes each of the devices served by these breakers

5.19 Verify receptacle is properly connected by testing with a receptacle polarity tester

Item Task Initial Date

5.20 If panel is equipped with a cooling fan or air conditioner, verify proper operation

5.21 Verify that the correct DC voltage is present on the output of the DC power supply(s)

5.22 Verify that the correct DC voltage is present on the output of the DC UPS

5.23 Action: If panel is equipped with DC circuit breakers for auxiliary devices, close each circuit breaker one at a time
 Verify that the correct DC voltage is present at each of the devices served by these circuit breakers

5.24 Verify each DC circuit breaker de-energizes and energizes each of the devices served by these circuit breakers

5.25 Action: If panel is equipped with DC fuses for auxiliary devices (not fuses associated with I/O loops), close each fused disconnect terminal block one at a time
 Verify that the correct DC voltage is present at each of the devices served by these fuses

5.26 Action: If panel is equipped with DC fuses for I/O loops, close each fused disconnect terminal block one at a time
 Verify that the correct DC voltage is present at each of the I/O served by these fuses

5.27 Verify each DC fuse de-energizes and energizes each of the devices or I/O points served by these fuses

6 UPS Functional Testing

6.1 The following sequence is used to verify the UPS is operating correctly. Perform each step in the order listed. Do not proceed to the next step until the previous step has been completed successfully

6.2 Action: Disconnect the battery from the DC UPS by opening the battery fuse
 Verify that DC voltage is maintained on the output of the DC UPS Action: Following the test, reconnect battery backup

6.3 Action: Open the AC main circuit breaker
 Verify there is no DC voltage on the output of the DC UPS Action: Following the test, close the AC main circuit breaker and verify the DC voltage is present on the output of the DC UPS

6.4 Action: If the panel is equipped with an auxiliary contact on the AC circuit breaker for the DC power supply, open circuit breaker  Verify there is no DC voltage on the output of the DC UPS Action: Following the test, close the AC circuit breaker for the DC power supply and verify the DC voltage is present on the output of the DC UPS

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21A-5

6.5 Action: Simulate an electrical trip of the AC main circuit breaker by pressing the test button on the front of the axillary contact  Verify there is no AC voltage on the output of the main circuit breaker
 Verify that DC voltage is maintained on the output of the DC UPS Action: Following the test, reset the AC main circuit breaker and connect the AC power to the panel. Verify the DC voltage is present on the output of the DC UPS

Item Task Initial Date

6.6 Action: If the panel is equipped with an auxiliary contact on the AC circuit breaker for the DC power supply, simulate an electrical trip of the circuit breaker by pressing the test button on the front of the axillary contact
 Verify that there is no AC power on the input to the DC power supply
 Verify that DC voltage is maintained on the output of the DC UPS Action: Following the test, reset the AC circuit breaker for the DC power supply and connect the AC power to the panel. Verify the DC voltage is present on the output of the DC UPS

7 UPS Runtime Testing

7.1 Using the actions listed below, verify the runtime of the UPS. Perform each step in the order listed. Do not proceed to the next step until it is completed successfully.

7.2 Verify all devices powered by the UPS are powered on. Also, all the fuses, circuit breakers, and disconnects (including fuses associated with I/O loops) in the panel must be closed

7.3 Verify the UPS battery is fully charged

7.4 Action: Turn off AC power to the panel without opening the AC main circuit breaker or AC main fused disconnect terminal block  Verify that DC voltage on the output of the DC UPS is maintained for at least: 10 minutes.

Action: Following the test, turn on AC power to panel, verify the UPS is charging the battery backup

8 I/O Checkout

8.1 Using the actions listed below, verify every I/O point operates correctly, including the ones marked as spare. Check off each point on the I/O list after it is verified

8.2 Action: Configure the PLC for I/O checkout (PLC program, networking configured, etc.)

8.3 Action: Test each digital input by applying the appropriate voltage or by applying a jumper to the field terminals (as applicable for each input) and checking the status light on the input module and appropriate tag in the Controller (refer to I/O check list)

8.4 Action: Test each digital output by forcing the output in the Controller and checking the status light on the output module and that the correct voltage or contact state (as applicable for each output) is present at the field terminals (refer to I/O check list)

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21A-6

8.5 Action: Test each analog input by applying 4mA, 12mA, 20mA to the filed terminals and checking that the tag in the Controller varies accordingly (refer to I/O check list)
Action: Test each channel wire break alarm by applying <3mA and >21mA to the filed terminals and checking that the tag in the Controller for wire break activates accordingly

Item Task Initial Date

8.6 Action: Test each analog output by forcing the output in the Controller to values between min. & max. and checking that the current at the field terminals varies accordingly (refer to I/O check list)
Action: Test each channel wire break alarm by connecting and disconnecting a multi meter to the filed terminals and checking that the tag in the Controller for wire break activates accordingly

8.7 Action: If panel is equipped with a panel temperature monitor, verify the value read by the Controller against a self-contained thermometer placed next to the panel temperature monitor

8.8 Action: If the panel is equipped with any indicating lights or process displays, verify they operate correctly

8.9 Action: If the panel is equipped with any enclosure work lights, verify they operate correctly

9 Closeout

9.1 Verify the drawings issued for panel construction have been redlined to reflect all changes made during construction and testing

9.2 Verify all corrected non-conformances have been retested and signed off

9.3 Verify any remaining non-corrected non-conformances have been documented, reviewed for next action, and assigned to the appropriate party

9.4 The panel has been cleaned, vacuumed. and all the wire duct covers are installed

9.5 Detailed photos of panel have been taken. Verify the photos clearly show the overall assembly and close up details of the wire and terminal numbering for every component

9.6 Verify all non-conformance items have been:
 Corrected, re-tested, and signed off
OR
 Responsibility for tracking transferred to the appropriate party

9.7 Detailed photos of the panel have been saved

9.8 Redlined drawings have been submitted to the Owner/Engineer

9.9 All testing documentation has been scanned and submitted to the Owner/Engineer

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING 40 61 21A-7

Owner/Engineer Approval

Name

Signature

Date

☐ Approved ☐ NOT Approved ☐ Other

Comments

END

OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
40 63 43-1

SECTION 40 63 43

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope

1. This Section specifies requirements for programmable logic controllers (PLC) designed to execute discrete and continuous control logic with high reliability in industrial applications. Enclosures and components are specified in Section 40 67

00. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References

1. This section contains references to the following documents or documents listed in Sections 26 05 00, 40 61 13, and 40 67 00. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

2. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no bids).

3. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued.

4. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

a. Reference b. Title
c. IEC 61131-
3 d. Programmable Controllers – Part 3: Programming
Languages
e. NEMA IA

2.2 f. Programmable Controllers – Equipment
Requirements and Tests
g. NEMA IA

2.3 h. Programmable Controllers – Part 3: Programming
Languages

B. Contractors PICS Supplier

1. Responsibilities and qualifications shall be as specified in Section 40 61 13.

C. Factory Acceptance Tests

1. Factory Acceptance Tests are specified in Section 40 61 21 and scheduled in paragraph 1.01 PLC Schedule.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
40 63 43-2

a. Submit factory test forms for approval prior to tests. b. Provide all expenses for one (1) Owner staff member and one (1) Engineer staff member to witness factory testing. Travel shall be during business hours on weekdays.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings

1. Submittal requirements per Section 40 67 00 for the equipment specified herein, including:
a. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark (ü) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. b. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. c. The Owners Representative shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications.
d. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal without further consideration.

2. Drawings containing the following information to be submitted as part of Specification Section 40 67 00 (control panels) submittals:
a. Arrangement drawings for PLC system components.
b. Panel and enclosure plans, sections and details.
c. Access opening locations and required clearances for each panel and enclosure.
d. Enclosure internal wiring and terminal blocks.
e. I/O Rack and I/O Module Layout.
f. PLC Input/Output (I/O) loop diagram drawings.
g. Internal power distribution schematic diagram drawings. h. Network communications diagram.
i. Catalog cut sheets containing information on PLC components to be submitted as part of these specification section submittals.

3. List of spare parts to be provided.

B. Informational Submittals

1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
40 63 43-3

2. Index of all training offered by PLC system equipment manufacturers including operations and maintenance.

3. List of all recommended spares for maintenance purposes with each item separately priced.

4. Factory Acceptance Test Schedule And Forms
a. Submit under Section 40 61 21 and per the requirements of this Section.

C. Operating and Maintenance Information

1. Manufacturer, Representative, and Supplier contact information.

2. Manufacturer instruction manuals shall include only the following as applicable to the PLC system:
a. Safety Precautions
b. Environmental Conditions
c. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
d. Component connection diagrams
e. Removal and replacement instructions
f. Include the location and phone numbers of service centers (including 24 HR "hot lines").

3. Warranty information for all software and PLC hardware

4. Final reviewed submittal

5. As-built drawings with record of switch and jumper settings for all components.

6. List of spare parts provided
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Manufacturer

1. The Owner and Engineer require the specified Manufacturer to provide the equipment and/or products to be furnished under this section. The Owner and Construction Manager believe the Manufacturer is capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this section. This statement, however, shall not be construed to mean that the named Manufacturer’s standard product will comply with the requirements of this section.

2. Manufacturers and models shall be as specified for the purpose of compatible and efficient utilization of existing equipment, supplies, and personnel training and experience, no substitutions are permitted.

3. The following manufacturers are acceptable:
a. Rockwell Automation: Allen-Bradley.
b. No accepted equal due to standardization.

B. Materials

1. Equipment and/or products shall be new and unused at the time of system assembly.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
40 63 43-4

C. Controller conforming to NEMA IA 2.2, and with required memory and functional capacity to perform specified sequence of operation with scheduled input and output points.

1. RFI/EMI Susceptibility: MIL STD 461B CS02

2. Showering Arc Test: NEMA Pub No ICS2-230.42

3. Surge Withstand: ANSI C37.90a

4. RFI Immunity: IEC 801-3

5. Ground Continuity: IEC 801-5

6. Electrostatic Discharge: IEC 801-2

7. Electromagnetic Field: IEC 61000-4-3

8. Fast transients: IEC 61000-4-4

2.02 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
A. Manufacturer

1. Allen-Bradley
B. NEMA IA 2.3 and IEC 61131-3 compliant program editor. Program to be written using the same type of software as is specified below.

C. Networking Connections: Provide all communication interfaces, network cables, taps, terminators, power supplies, and accessories for a complete operating network.

1. Ethernet/IP
D. Processor

1. With Ethernet port and serial port dedicated solely for programming use, minimum 1 MB memory for IEC 1131 control programs, and 1 GB secure data card. Provide additional serial communications adapters required for other serial interfacing. Include real-time clock.

2. Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069-L310ERK
E. Input and Output Modules

1. Discrete Inputs: 5069-IB16K, 24 Vdc Sink Input, 16 channel, conformal coating.

2. Discrete Outputs: 5069-OB16K, 24 Vdc Source Output, 16 channel, conformal coating

3. Analog Inputs: 5069-IY4K 4-20 mAdc/1-5 Vdc, isolated channel-to-channel, 4 channel, conformal coating

4. Analog Outputs: 5069-OF4K, 4-20 mAdc, 4 channel, conformal coating

5. I/O module terminations: By Manufacturer to match module

6. I/O module interface modules: Provide as necessary including cabling to interface all I/O to processor.

7. Installed and wired Spare Input/Outputs: One spare card of each type in each enclosure.

8. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 5069 series compact modules F. Power Supplies:

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
40 63 43-5

1. Single, 120 Vac input.

2.03 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
A. The following software shall be provided by the Owner’s Systems Integrator for this project.

1. Programmable Logic Controller
a. Prior to bid and prior to commencing construction the Owner’s System Integrator shall verify the current software version in use by the City. b. Manufacturer:
1) Allen-Bradley Studio 5000 Logix Designer Version 34, and RSLinx

2.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Programmable Logic Controller

1. One (1) of each unique processor card.

2. One (1) of each unique communication card.

3. One (1) for each ten, minimum of one for each unique I/O card.

4. One (1) of each unique power supply.

2.05 CONTROL PANEL FABRICATION
A. Refer to Section 40 67 00.

B. Detail shop drawings showing field connections and any terminal block jumpering required.

C. Terminate all used and spare I/O wiring to terminal blocks and interposing relays.

D. Create wire markers with “to-from” component name, PLC slot/base, or terminal column number and terminal number information identical at each end.

Provide terminal Blocks for field connections to PLC Discrete Inputs:

1. One (1) fused terminal with LED for each group of eight (8) inputs, connected to control power.

2. One (1) terminal per PLC input connected to the fused terminal to provide power to each field input circuit.

3. One (1) terminal per PLC input.

4. One (1) common terminal for each group of eight (8) inputs, connected to control power common.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
40 63 43-6

E. Provide terminal Blocks for field connections to PLC Discrete Outputs:

1. One (1) fused terminal with LED for each output, connected to control power.

2. Provide a interposing relay for each PLC output.

3. One (1) common terminal for each output, connected to control power common.

4. One (1) terminal for relay COMMON terminal

5. One (1) terminal for relay NORMALLY OPEN terminal
F. Provide terminal Blocks for field connections to PLC Analog Inputs:

1. One (1) fused terminal with LED for each input, connected to +24 Vdc.

2. Two (2) terminals per PLC input.

3. One (1) common terminal for each input, connected to 24 Vdc common.

4. One (1) ground terminal for each input shield, connected to signal ground bus.

5. Two (2) surge protecting terminals for each field mounted instrument or equipment, grounded to the frame ground bus.

G. Provide terminal Blocks for field connections to PLC Analog Outputs:

1. One (1) fused terminal with LED for each output, connected to +24 Vdc.

2. Two (1) terminals per PLC output.

3. One (1) common terminal for each output, connected to 24 Vdc common.

4. One (1) ground terminal for each output shield, connected to signal ground bus.

5. Two (2) surge protecting terminals for field mounted equipment, grounded to the frame ground bus.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 40 67 00.

B. Complete Functioning Control System Cabinet.

1. Provide all the Enclosure, Terminal Blocks, Relays, Sockets, Timers, Wiring, Wiring Devices, grounding, Wireways, Conduits, Penetrations, Bushing, Cable Ties, DIN Rail, Power Supplies, Control Circuit Devices and Components, coordination, and testing required for furnishing a fully-functioning Controls System Cabinet per Plans and Specification.

C. Connect input and output devices to the PLC via control panel terminal blocks, not directly to the PLC.

D. Remain onsite at all times starting at the beginning of commissioning.

E. Coordinate system testing, commissioning, and startup with Owner’s SI

3.02 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Refer to Section 40 67 00.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
40 63 43-7

B. The supplier of each PLC system shall provide a qualified service representative to perform the following:

1. Inspect the PLC installation including I/O and network systems, hardware configuration switch, and jumper settings.

2. Monitor all PLC system diagnostic indicators, both hardware and software, and certify that the PLC system performance meets or exceeds the Manufacturer’s published specifications.

3. Assist in all testing. The contractor will provide a minimum of one (1) man-weeks onsite for each PLC I/O rack.

4. Certify in writing to the Engineer that the PLC system has been installed and configured in accordance with the Manufacturer’s published guidelines.

3.03 DOCUMENTATION
A. Update O&M manuals to reflect as-built conditions.

3.04 SUPPORT
A. Provide on-call technical support for a period of one (1) year after substantial completion. Include a minimum of three (3) one (1) day site visits to work with owner on any final modifications to the logic.

3.05 PLC TRAINING
A. Employee of the manufacturer or certified representative to provide five (5) days of operation and maintenance training for two (2) groups at the project site after the system has successfully undergone all field testing and acceptance procedures.

1. As a minimum, training shall cover:
a. Hardware overview
b. Documentation
c. Maintenance
d. Troubleshooting
e. Operation (e.g., changing set points, passwords, etc.)

END OF SECTION

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

CONTROL SYSTEM PANELS AND RACKS
40 67 00-1

SECTION 40 67 00
CON

TROL SYSTEM PANELS AND RACKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION
A. This section specifies requirements for control panels. As part of this work, thi s includes the following:

1. Fabricate, factory test, deliver, site test, and commission one control panel s.

2. Provide on-site assistance, direction, and coordination during installation, functi
onal check-out, startup, and commissioning of systems, and as needed throughout project closeout.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 1 – G ene ral Requirements
B. Division 26 – Ele ctrical
C. Division 40 – Pro cess Interconnections

1.3 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. In accordance with Section 40 61 13.

1.5 Q

UALITY ASSURANCE
A. The control panels shall be supplied by a single equipment manufacturer.

B.

The control panel equipment manufacturer shall have produced similar equipment for a mi
nimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be submitted.

C. All control panels shall be constructed in conformance with NFPA 70 and 70E.

D. Equipment components and devices shall installed as listed by UL (or other National ly Recognized Testing Laboratory). The completed control panel shall be UL Listed in accordance with UL 508 and 508A and other applicable UL standards. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

CONTROL SYSTEM PANELS AND RACKS
40 67 00-2

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION/DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Division 1.

1.8 W

ARRANTY
A. In accordance with Division 1.

PA
RT 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL
A. All control panels shall be constructed in a UL approved production facility and bear al
l applicable UL labels for panel construction.

B. The completed control panels shall be factory tested prior to shipment.

C. Router IR1101 and Antenna ANT-4-5G-O shall be procured by Owner and provided to Contractor for installation in control panels.

2.2 CONTROL PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A. All control panel designs provided as part of the Contract Documents are fabricatio n r
eady.

B. All bill of material items as part of the Contract Documents are “NO EQ UAL” and shall be provided as shown in the bill of materials.

1. Equal parts or substitutions may only be approved following written approval by the Owner/Engineer.

C. Isolated Din Rail

1. Each isolated din rail shall be installed on insulated standoffs to create isol atio n between the din rail and the back panel. Each din rail will have a single grounding terminal block, which is to be connected directly to the ground bus with a single conductor of GREEN, 14 AWG, MTW wire.

D. Ground Bus

1. Mount ground bus directly to back panel.

2. Bond the ground stud on enclosure door(s) directly to enclosure grounding stud(s
) with a single conductor of GREEN, 14 AWG, MTW wire.

3. Do not ground control components to back panel. Run single conductors directly t
o ground bus as shown in the Contract Documents.

E. Enclosure and Panel Assembly

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

CONTROL SYSTEM PANELS AND RACKS
40 67 00-3

1. Battery sensor module to be installed to back panel using zinc plated standoffs.

Instal
l
nylon washers on both sides of board at each mounting screw.

2. Attach wire duct to panel with metal fasteners.

3. Enclosure door stop to be installed with welded studs on the door a n d bolts with sealing washers on the enclosure.

F. Device Labels

1. Unless otherwise indicated, all component identification labels are to be self- adhesive pol
yester with black thermal printed text.

2. Additional component identification labels are to be mounted on the front of each de
vice. All labels to be of uniform size and font. Text to match the label on the end bracket next to the device.

G. Wire and Terminal Marking

1. All wire and terminal labels to be computer printed. No hand-wri t ten terminal or wire numbers are allowed.

2. Label all terminals with marker strips from the terminal manufact urer.

3. Label all wire/cable with heat shrink marking sleeves.

2.3 CONTROL PANEL ELECTRICAL
A. Control Panel Wiring

1. Field wiring shall be terminated on the appropriate side of the terminal blocks as shown in
the Contract Documents.

2. Use dual wire ferrules whenever 2 wires are inserted into a single termination poin
t.

3. Do not route wires against or fastened to cooling vents of control compo n ents.

4. Do not route panel wiring inside wire ducts that are marked as fiel d wiring.

5. Do not use nylon tie wraps inside wire duct.

6. Wires and cables routed outside of wire ducts shall be fixed to enclosure with wire saddl
es at a minimum of every 4 inches.

7. Wire saddles are to be mounted using threaded studs welded to enclosure, do not use
adhesive backed wire saddles.

8. Wires and cables routed to doors shall be flexible and wrapped in a wire lo om.

Secure wiring on each side of the hinge so that any bending or twisting will be around the length of the wire.

B. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, control wiring shall be sized and col
ored as follows:

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

CONTROL SYSTEM PANELS AND RACKS
40 67 00-4

1. 120VAC = RED, 14 AWG, MTW

2. 120VAC Neutral = WHITE, 14 AWG, MTW

3. 120VAC not disconnected by panels main circuit breaker = ORANGE, 14 A WG, MTW

4. 24VDC = BLUE, 16 AWG, MTW

5. N-DC = WHITE/BLUE, 16 AWG, MTW

6. Ground = GREEN, 14 AWG, MTW

7. Discrete Inputs = BLUE, 18 AWG, MTW, or manufacturers multi-conductor cabl
e

8. Discrete Outputs = YELLOW, 18 AWG, MTW

9. Analog Inputs and Outputs = PURPLE, 18 AWG, MTW

2.4 CONTROL PANEL COOLING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

2.5 SPARE PARTS (NOT USED) PART
3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Q U

ALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work provided as part of this section shall be assembled, interconnected, and fun
cti
onally tested at the assembly shop prior to shipment (factory testing) in accordance with section 40 61 21.

3.2 FACTORY TESTING
A. Factory testing shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by Ow ne r for each control panel.

1. Testing procedure shall conform to Section 40 61 21.

2. Provide Travel Expenses for Owner Witnessed Testing if location is more than 60 mi
les from Project Location.

3. Factory testing shall be accepted in writing by Owner prior to shipment of control panels.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and devices for the work shall be installed in the locations shown in th e Contract Documents, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Installation shall not begin prior to site testing and start-up plan submittal acceptance by Owner
/Engineer.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

CONTROL SYSTEM PANELS AND RACKS
40 67 00-5

C. Control panels supported directly by concrete or concrete block walls shall be spaced ou
t
not less than 1-5/8 inch byunistrut channel between instrument and wall. Sills shall be leveled so panel structures will not be distorted. Panels shall be shimmed to precise alignment so doors operate without binding and mounted where shock or vibration will impair its operation.

D. Support systems shall not be attached to handrails, process piping or mechanical equipment.

Control panels supported directly by concrete or concrete block walls shall be spaced out from the wall to provide for air circulation around the panels.

E. Steel used for support of equipment shall be 316 stainless steel. Support systems includi
ng panels shall be designed to prevent deformation greater than 1/8 inch under the attached equipment load and an external load of 200 pounds in any direction.

F. Floor-mounted cabinets, shall be mounted on 3-1/2-inch minimum height concre t e pads or grouted bases as as shown on contract drawings.

G. Panels shall be shimmed to precise alignment so doors operate without binding.

Sea
lant shall be provided under panels not located in dry control or electrical equipment rooms.

H. Center-line of wall-mounted panels shall be 48 inches above the floor and mat ch the height of adjacent panels unless otherwise required by local building code and authority having jurisdiction.

I. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of all equipment in
the proposed locations with all other trades performing work on the project that may be affected.

J. Provide required safety labels.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.

B
. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specif
ied in manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 FIELD ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mech
ani
cal and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install loop isolators as needed for field powered analog inputs.

1. Loop isolators shall be of type Phoenix Contact, 2902061.

3.6 SITE TESTING
A. Site testing shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by Owner for each con
trol panel.

1. Testing procedure shall conform to Section 40 61 21.

CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS

CONTROL SYSTEM PANELS AND RACKS
40 67 00-6

2. Factory testing shall be accepted in writing by Owner prior to shipment o f control panels.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the control panels.

Remove
di
rt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.

3.8 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION
A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the man
ufact
urer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced.

3.9 MANUFACTURER’S CE RTIFICATION (NOT USED)

3.10 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Include all changes and/or alterations in the control panels prior to final insp
ection
and acceptance by the Owner.

B. Any changes and/or alterations in the Control Panels shall be reflected
/updated in all Control Panel Schematics prior to acceptance by the Owner.

3.11 TRAINING (NOT USED)

END

OF SECTION

APPENDIX A

SWPPP TEMPLATE

TEMPORARY STAGING MAP
APPROX. (200'X15')
3,000 SF

TEMPORARY

CONSTRUCTION

STAGING AREA

INSTALL TEMPORARY

FENCE TO SECURE
AREA. SEE NOTES.

GARFIELD ST. CONSTRUCTION STAGING
(OPTIONAL)
(EXHIBIT 1)
NOTES:

1. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION STAGING, FENCING, TRAFFIC CONTROL, AND ALL OTHER

ITEMS OF WORK SHALL BE CONSIDERED INCIDENTAL TO THE BID ITEM FOR MOBILIZATION AND OTHER ITEMS OF WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

2. STAGING AREA SHALL BE IN PARKING SPACES, AC PAVEMENT, AND DISTURBED AREAS, AS APPROVED BY THE CITY. MAINTAIN TRAFFIC IN BOTH DIRECTIONS. ADHERE TO

REQUIREMENTS AS APPROVED BY THE CITY RIGHT OF WAY PERMIT, INCLUDING TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS.

DATE AVE.

GARFIELD ST.

APPENDIX A

SWPPP TEMPLATE

APPENDIX B

VALLEY STREET
SEE SHEET 3 FOR DETAILS
PLANT
BUILDING3000

CHILLER

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION NOTES
APN :

TIER 2 CITY STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (TIER 2 SWPPP) AREA OF DISTURBANCECONSTRUCTION THREAT: OWNER/APPLICANT: SITE ADDRESS:EMERGENCY CONTACT :
2 1
PROJECT NAME:

SHEET INDEX:

TIER 2
OWNER'S CERTIFICATION:

STAMP
IF

APPLICABLE

WEATHER TRIGGERED ACTION PLAN

VICINITY MAP
LEGEND
CASQA DesignationConstruction Activity(BMP) DescriptionBest Management Practice* Erosion Control
Sediment Control BMPs
BMPs
Tracking
Control BMPs
Non-Storm WaterManagement BMPs
Waste Management and Materials
Pollution Control BMPs

BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMP) SELECTION TABLE

PIO PICO DRIVE (PUBLIC)
2 2
PROJECT NAME:

TIER 2
TIER 2 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP)
SAMPLE

EROSION CONTROL PLAN

APPENDIX A

SWPPP TEMPLATE

APPENDIX C

AS-BUILTS
(REFERENCE ONLY)

CONSTRUCTION PLANS TOP

IULLINL
CHINQUAPIN SEWER LIFT STATION.
6 " FORCE MAIN AND 8 " SEWER
EXISTING 8" VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE

GRAVITY SEWER PIPELINE
riON

CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT

CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA
EXISTING 6" TRANSITE

FORCE MAIN
NEW 6" PVC SEWER

FORCE MAIN
MARCH 1999

BOARD OF DIRECTORS
1 GARFIELD STREET
F_ JT
I
25' t
i
25'
Iz
jLiJ
1<
CL

iz
P
GUARD RAIL APN 206-070-10 /
/ 112202
CLAUDE A. "BUD" LEWIS-PRESIDENT

RAMONA FINNILA-VICE PRESIDENT SITE PLAN
ANN J. KULCHIN-DIRECTOR

MATT HALL-DIRECTOR

JULIE N YGAARD- DIRECTOR

EXISTING SEWER

LIFT STATION

VICINITY'MAP

NO SCALE
NEW 8" -
RAYMOND R. PATCH ETT- EXECU TI VE MANAGER

PVC SEWER
ROBERT J. GREANEY-GENERAL MANAGER
WILLIAM E. PLUM MER- DISTRICT ENGINEER LOCATION MAP
SCALE: 1"=50'
CITY PAY2/ECTNI2 3f941
'II

DETAILED INDEX OF SHEETS GENERAL NOTES SYMBOLS
'" "

SHEET NUMBER TITLE - -- -- -
EXISTING PLUG VALVE ,-.,--,-,--, TRANSFORMER

1. ALL SEWER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE 1 TITLE SHEET WITH THE CMWD'S SEWER SYSTEM—DESIGN CRITERIA, STANDARD DRAWINGS AND 5 100A NEW N CHECK VALVE CIRCUIT BREAKER—RATING AND POLES LISTED 2 GENERAL NOTES SPECIFICATIONS, (MARCH 1993) AND THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC I 3 EQUIPMENT LIST WORKS CONSTRUCTION, LATEST EDITION (GREEN BOOK). -
- W EXISTING WATER LINE KNIFE GATE VALVE 30A FUSE—NUMBER DENOTES SIZE 4 SITE PLAN 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AN EXCAVATION PERMIT FROM THE DIVISION OF INDUSTRIAL 5 8" GRAVITY SEWER PLAN AND PROFILE SAFETY BEFORE ANY EXCAVATION AND SHALL ADHERE TO ALL PROVISIONS OF THE 25 EXISTING CONTOUR DRESSER COUPLING CONTROL RELAY—LETER AND NUMBER DESIGNATION 6 6" FORCE MAIN PLAN AND PROFILE STATE SAFETY ORDERS.
7 TRENCH SECTIONS AND DETAILS 25 NEW CONTOUR X SPOT ELEVATION H F RELAY CONTACT—NORMALLY OPEN 8 LIFT STATION 3. BEFORE ANY CONNECTION TO THE DISTRICT'S EXISTING SYSTEM, A PERMIT SHALL BE Ri 9 DAVIT CRANE AND DETAILS OBTAINED FROM THE DISTRICT. IT MUST BE SIGNED AND APPROVED BY THE DISTRICT -

EXISTING FENCE I I NEW PAVEMENT GROUND
10 VAULT LADDER AND DETAILS ENGINEER AND OPERATIONS SUPERINTENDENT. 11 LIFT STATION TOP SLAB AND DETAILS 4. BEFORE CONSTRUCTION BEGINS IN ANY PUBLIC RIGHT OF WAY, A CITY RIGHT OF WAY PERMIT x NEW FENCE VAULT HATCH COVER ELECTRIC METER 12 VAULT BASE SLAB AND DETAILS SHALL BE OBTAINED.
13 UTILITY COORDINATION PLAN

5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE CITY OF CARLSBAD ENGINEERING INSPEC TION 48 HOURS S EXISTING SEWER LINE I/I
EDGE OF PAVEMENT MOTOR—NUMBER DENOTES HORSEPO WER
14 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. TELEPHONE (760)438-3891. 15 LADDER LOGIC DIAGRAM S NEW SEWER LINE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE GROUND ROD WELL 16 LEVEL CONTROL AND TELEMETRY
17 CONDUIT AND WIRE SCHEDULE FM - EXISTING FORCE MAIN IilII EARTH LIGHT—LETTER DENOTES COLOR 18 DISCONNECT SWITCH AND DETAILS
19 TRAFFIC CONTROL NOTES

SDG&E STANDARD NOTES
____ ____

FM NEW FORCE MAIN HOSE BIBB OVERLOAD RELAY
20 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 1
21 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 2
- RIGHT OF WAY/PROPERTY —{- WATER METER RESET PUSHBUTTON 22 SIGNING AND MARKING PLAN 1. PRIOR TO TRENCHING, CALL 1-800-422-4133 AND HAVE EXISTING UTILITIES LOCATED. 23 LANDSCAPE SITE PLAN ALLOW 48 HOURS.
-
— STREET CENTERLINE — j - BACKFLOW PREVENTER GROUND ROD WELL 24 IRRIGATION SITE PLAN 2. CALL THE SDG&E INSPECTOR AT (760) 432-5822 TO ARRANGE A MEETING TO DISCUSS THE FOLLOWING CONSIDERATIONS: - - -
E — — — NEW ELECTRIC LINE —€0-- FLOW METER -o-- LEVEL SWITCH—NORMALLY OPEN A. BEGINNING AND ENDING OF TRENCH

REFERENCE DRAWINGS -
B. TRENCH DEPTH, ROUTE, AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
C. ACCEPTABLE CONDUITS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED --- T --- NEW TELEPHONE LINE JUNCTION BOX D. SEPERATION AND LOCATION OF OTHER UTILITIES
E. LOCATION OF CONDUIT ON POLE
DWG 124-6 SEWER LIFT STATION AND FORCE MAIN (1960) 3. EXCAVATE, TRENCH AND PROVIDE ACCEPTABLE 3" BASE, INSTALL CONDUIT, SERVICE ENTRANCE DWG 227-8 CARLSBAD BLVD BRIDGE EQUIPMENT AT METER, AND PULL ROPE; THEN CALL SDG&E FOR INSPECTION. DO NOT COVER ABBREVIATIONS DWG 270-2 12" ACP WATER PIPELINE CONDUIT WITHOUT INSPECTOR'S WRITTEN APPROVAL TO BACKFILL. -

4. PROVIDE AND INSTALL ACCEPTABLE SHADING MATERIAL AND CALL FOR SDG&E INSPECTION; A AMP MAX MAXIMUM COMPACTION IS REQUIRED. AB AGGREGATE BASE MCP MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR

RELATED STANDARD DRAWINGS

AC ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIN MINIMUM

5. CALL THE SDG&E INSPECTOR FOR FINAL TRENCH INSPECTION OF BACKFILL, COMPACTION AND ACP ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPE MSC MAIN SERVICE CENTER CONDUIT MANDRELLING. AH ACCESSHOLE OC ON CENTER

CMWD SDRSD AIC AMP INTERRUPTING CURRENT OL OVERLOAD
APN ACCESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER P PHASE/POLE 51 G-1 1-5
W3 G-2 CROSS REFERENCING SYSTEM -
ATS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Pi PUSH JOINT
W15 G-10 PRESSURE SWITCH CLR CLEAR PS
W20 G-24, TYPE A CML&C CEMENT MORTAR LINED AND COATED PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH

CMU CEMENT MASONARY UNIT PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

1. A SECTION CUT ON DRAWING Mi IS IDENTIFIED AS FOLLOWS: *LETTER INDICATES SHEET TYPE CMWD CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT RC REMOTE CONTROL

DEFINITIONS

CID COMPRESSOR SDG&E SAN DIEGO GAS AND ELECTRIC

SECTION LETTER C - GENERAL

C - CIVIL

DIP DUCTILE IRON PIPE SDRSD SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWINGS

DIRECTION OF VIEW M - MECHANICAL DOC DOCUMENT SCH SCHEDULE

A S - STRUCTURAL DS DISCONNECT SWITCH SF SQUARE FOOT ENGINEER DISTRICT ENGINEER OF THE CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT E - ELECTRICAL

AGENCY CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT L - LANDSCAPE DWG DRAWING SS STAINLESS STEEL INSPECTOR ENGINEER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE *DRAWING WHERE SEC110N IS SHOWN EL ELEVATION SSPWC STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION

ETM ELAPSED TIME METER TAC TRANSITE ASBESTOS CEMENT

2. ON DRAWING M2 THE SECTION IS IDENTIFIED AS FOLLOWS: FSH FLOAT SWITCH HIGH TYP TYPICAL

DIG ALERT

FSL FLOAT SWITCH LOW
FLANGE
V VOLT
SECTION LETTER FLG VA VOLT—AMPS